SLS AMGCoupe and Coupe GT, Roadster and Roadster GTOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 4878 13 Part no. 197 584 13 81 Edition A 2013

É1975841381xËÍ1975841381

SLSA

MGOp

erator

'sMa

nual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websiteshttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOperator's Manual to the technicaldocumentation team at the followingaddress:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission of Daimler AG.

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofPrince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark ofHarman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® areregistered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark ofiBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands areregistered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual, you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 27.03.2012

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow theinstructions and warning notices in thismanual. Ignoring them could result in damageto the vehicle or personal injury to you orothers.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1975841381 É1975841381xËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 18

At a glance ........................................... 25

Safety ................................................... 35

Opening and closing ........................... 61

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 81

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 91

Climate control ................................. 101

Driving and parking .......................... 111

On-board computer and displays .... 145

Stowage and features ...................... 195

Maintenance and care ...................... 213

Breakdown assistance ..................... 227

Wheels and tires ............................... 247

Technical data ................................... 273

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Function/notes ................................ 55Warning lamp ................................. 189

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 104ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 58Additional speedometer ................... 154Additives (engine oil) ........................ 280Adjusting lumbar support .................. 84Air bags

Display message ............................ 167Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 39Head bag ......................................... 41Important safety notes .................... 38Knee bag .......................................... 40PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 42Safety guidelines ............................. 37Side impact air bag .......................... 40

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air filter (display message) .............. 176AIRSCARF

Setting the vents ........................... 109Switching on/off .............................. 85

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 108Setting ........................................... 108Setting the AIRSCARF vents .......... 109Setting the center air vents ........... 108Setting the side air vents ............... 108Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 85see Climate control

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMGAdaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 136Button for AMG menu .................... 124E-SELECT lever .............................. 117

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 157SETUP ............................................ 124SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-gear sporttransmission .................................. 117

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 199ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay

Hiding service messages ............... 218Service messages .......................... 217

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 58Function ........................................... 58Switching off the alarm .................... 58

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 151Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshops

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 170Automatic headlamp mode ................ 92

BBackup lamp

Display message ............................ 171BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 55Battery

Display message ............................ 181Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 64Important safety notes .................... 63Replacing ......................................... 64

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 238Display message ............................ 174Important safety notes .................. 236Jump starting ................................. 240

4 Index

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 153Display message ............................ 177Notes/function .............................. 141

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 165Notes ............................................. 280

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 170

BrakesABS .................................................. 55BAS .................................................. 55Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 280Display message ............................ 161Driving tips .................................... 131High-performance brake system .... 133Important safety notes .................. 131Maintenance .................................. 132Warning lamp ........................ 186, 189

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Changing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 19

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Capacitiessee Technical data

Carsee Vehicle

CareCar wash ........................................ 219Display ........................................... 225Exhaust pipe .................................. 224Exterior lights ................................ 224Gear or selector lever .................... 225Matte finish ................................... 222Notes ............................................. 219Paint .............................................. 221Plastic trim .................................... 225

Power washer ................................ 221Rear view camera .......................... 224Seat belt ........................................ 226Seat cover ..................................... 226Sensors ......................................... 224Soft top .......................................... 222Steering wheel ............................... 225Trim pieces .................................... 225Washing by hand ........................... 220Wheels ........................................... 221Windows ........................................ 223Wiper blades .................................. 223Wooden trim .................................. 225

Car wash (care) ................................. 219CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 151Center console

Lower section .................................. 31Upper section .................................. 30

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 155Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 62

Changing bulbsImportant safety notes .................... 96License plate lighting ....................... 97

Charge maintenance socket ............ 211Children

In the vehicle ................................... 51Restraint systems ............................ 51

Child seatSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 53Top Tether ....................................... 53

Cigarette lighter ................................ 199Climate control

Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 103Controlling automatically ............... 105Cooling with air dehumidification . . 104Defrosting the windows ................. 107Defrosting the windshield .............. 106Important safety notes .................. 102Indicator lamp ................................ 105Maximum cooling .......................... 106Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 104Overview of systems ...................... 102

Index 5

Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 105Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 107Refrigerant ..................................... 280Setting the air distribution ............. 105Setting the airflow ......................... 106Setting the air vents ...................... 108Setting the temperature ................ 105Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 107Switching on/off ........................... 104Switching theMONO function on/off .................................................. 106Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 107

CockpitOverview .......................................... 26see Instrument cluster

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch ............................ 94Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 148Convenience closing feature .............. 75Convenience opening feature ............ 75

see Opening/closing the sidewindows (all)

CoolantDisplay message ............................ 173

Coolant (engine)Checking the level ......................... 216Important safety notes .................. 280Temperature (on-board computer) . 157

Coolingsee Climate control

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ................................................. 96Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 135Deactivating ................................... 136Display message ............................ 176Driving system ............................... 134Function/notes ............................. 134Important safety notes .................. 134LIM indicator lamp ......................... 135

Setting a speed .............................. 135Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 135

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 198Important safety notes .................. 198

Cup holderssee Cup holder

Curb weightsee Technical data

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 22Customer Relations Department ....... 22

DDashboard

see Cockpitsee Instrument cluster

Datasee Technical data

Daytime running lampsDisplay message ............................ 171Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 154Switching on/off (switch) ................ 92

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 21Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 155Interior lighting .............................. 155

Diagnostics connection ...................... 21Digital speedometer ......................... 149Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 225Display messages

ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay ........................................... 217Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 160Driving systems ............................. 176Engine ............................................ 172Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 160Lights ............................................. 169Safety systems .............................. 166Service interval display .................. 217SmartKey ....................................... 181Tires ............................................... 177Vehicle ........................................... 180

6 Index

Distance recorder ............................. 148see Trip odometer

Door control panelOverview .......................................... 33

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 155Automatic locking (switch) ............... 69Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 62Display message .................... 180, 182Emergency locking ........................... 70Emergency unlocking ....................... 69Important safety notes .................... 67Opening (from inside) ...................... 68

Draft stop ............................................. 78Drinking and driving ......................... 131Drive program .................................... 120

Automatic ...................................... 122Manual ........................................... 123SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 157

Drive program display ...................... 119Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 219Symmetrical low beam .................... 92

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving on flooded roads .................. 133Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 55ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 58BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 55EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution) ..................................... 58ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 56ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 56Important safety information ........... 54Overview .......................................... 54

Driving systemsAMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 136Blind Spot Assist ............................ 141Cruise control ................................ 134Display message ............................ 176

PARKTRONIC ................................. 137Rear view camera .......................... 140

Driving tipsAMG ceramic high-performancecompound brake system ............... 133Brakes ........................................... 131Break-in period .............................. 112Downhill gradient ........................... 131Drinking and driving ....................... 131Driving abroad ................................. 92Driving in winter ............................. 133Driving on wet roads ...................... 133Exhaust check ............................... 131Fuel ................................................ 130General .......................................... 130Hydroplaning ................................. 133Icy road surfaces ........................... 134Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 132Snow chains .................................. 250Symmetrical low beam .................... 92Wet road surface ........................... 132

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 151DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 151

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 156Function/notes ................................ 86

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ............................. 87Function/notes ................................ 86Switching on/off ........................... 156

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 162Function/notes ................................ 58

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 69Trunk ............................................... 73Vehicle ............................................. 69

Index 7

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 50Safety guidelines ............................. 37

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 19

EngineDisplay message ............................ 172Engine number ............................... 276Irregular running ............................ 116Starting .......................................... 114Starting problems .......................... 116Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 114Starting with the KEYLESS-GOstart function ................................. 114Switching off .................................. 128

Engine diagnostics warning lamp .... 191Engine electronics

Problem (malfunction) ................... 116Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 216Additives ........................................ 280Checking the oil level ..................... 215Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 215Displaymessage ................................ 174, 175Filling capacity ....................... 277, 280Notes about oil grades ................... 279Notes on oil level/consumption .... 215Temperature (on-board computer) . 157Temperature gauge ........................ 146Viscosity ........................................ 280

E-SELECT lever ................................... 117ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

Deactivating/activating ................... 56Display message ............................ 166Function/notes ................................ 56Important safety information ........... 56Warning lamp ................................. 190

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 56Exhaust check ................................... 131Exhaust pipe (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 224

Exterior lightingSetting options ................................ 92see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 87Dipping (automatic) ......................... 88Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 88Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 88Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 156Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 88Setting ............................................. 88Storing settings (memoryfunction) .......................................... 89Storing the parking position ............. 89

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 228Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 232Preparing the vehicle ..................... 229Raising the vehicle ......................... 233TIREFIT kit ...................................... 229

Floormat ............................................. 212Fuel

Additives ........................................ 279Consumption statistics .................. 148Displaying the range ...................... 149Driving tips .................................... 130Fuel gauge ....................................... 27Grade (gasoline) ............................ 278Important safety notes .................. 277Problem (malfunction) ................... 127Refueling ........................................ 124Tank content/reserve fuel ..... 277, 278

Fuel filler flap, opening/closing ....... 125Fuel filter (display message) ............ 176Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 149

Fuel tankCapacity ................................ 277, 278Problem (malfunction) ................... 127see Fuel tank

8 Index

Fuse boxFront-passenger footwell ............... 245Rear compartment ......................... 245

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 245Before changing ............................. 245Important safety notes .................. 244see Fuses

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 211Notes ............................................. 208Opening/closing the garage door .. 211Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 209

Gasoline ............................................. 278Gear indicator .................................... 119Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 225Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 274Glove box ........................................... 196

HHazard warning lamps ........................ 94Head bags ............................................ 41Headlamp cleaning system

Notes ............................................. 281Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 217Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 282Cleaning system (function) .............. 95Cleaning system (notes) ................ 281Fogging up ....................................... 95see Automatic headlamp mode

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 85Heating

see Climate controlHigh-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 171Switching on/off .............................. 94

Hill start assist .................................. 115Hood

Closing ........................................... 215Display message ............................ 180

Important safety notes .................. 214Opening ......................................... 214

Hydroplaning ..................................... 133

IIgnition lock ....................................... 113Immobilizer .......................................... 58Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 27Settings ......................................... 153Warning and indicator lamps ........... 28

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 154Interior lighting

Automatic control ............................ 95Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 155Emergency lighting .......................... 96Manual control ................................. 96Overview .......................................... 95Reading lamp ................................... 95

JJack

Storage location ............................ 228Using ............................................. 233

Jump-start (engine)see Jump starting (engine)

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 240

KKEYLESS-GO start function

Display message ............................ 181Start/Stop button .......................... 113Starting the engine ........................ 114

Key positionsSmartKey ....................................... 113

Kickdown ........................................... 120Driving tips .................................... 120

Knee bag .............................................. 40

Index 9

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 157License plate lamp

Changing bulbs ................................ 97Display message ............................ 171

LightsActivating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 155Automatic headlamp mode .............. 92Display message ............................ 169Driving abroad ................................. 92Hazard warning lamps ..................... 94High beam flasher ............................ 94High-beam headlamps ..................... 94Light switch ..................................... 92Low-beam headlamps ...................... 93Parking lamps .................................. 93Standing lamps ................................ 94Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 154Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 92Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 155Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 155Turn signals ..................................... 94see Changing bulbssee Lights

LIM indicator lampCruise control ................................ 135

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 69Emergency locking ........................... 70From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 68

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 156

Low-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 170Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................... 92Switching on/off .............................. 93

MM+S tires ............................................ 251Malfunction message

see Display messagesManual drive program ...................... 123Matte finish (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 222mbrace

Call priority .................................... 205Display message ............................ 169Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 205Emergency call .............................. 202Important safety notes .................. 201Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 206MB info call button ........................ 204Remote vehicle locking .................. 205Roadside Assistance button .......... 203Search & Send ............................... 205Self-test ......................................... 201System .......................................... 201

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 63Locking vehicle ................................ 70Unlocking the driver's door .............. 69

Memory card (audio) ......................... 151Memory function ................................. 89Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 160Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 152

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 63

10 Index

MP3Operation ....................................... 151see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 147Permanent display ......................... 154

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 147Overview .......................................... 29

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 149On-board computer ....................... 149see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a newvehicle ................................................ 112

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 42System self-test ............................... 45

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 51System overview .............................. 36

OCSFaults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 42System self-test ............................... 45

Odometer ........................................... 148see Trip odometer

On-board computerAMG menu ..................................... 157Audio menu ................................... 151Convenience submenu .................. 156Displaying a service message ........ 218Display messages .......................... 160Factory settings ............................. 156Important safety notes .................. 146Instrument cluster submenu .......... 153Lighting submenu .......................... 154Menu overview .............................. 148Message memory .......................... 160Navigation menu ............................ 149

Operation ....................................... 147RACETIMER ................................... 157Service menu ................................. 153Settings menu ............................... 153Standard display ............................ 148Telephone menu ............................ 152Trip menu ...................................... 148Vehicle submenu ........................... 156Video DVD operation ..................... 151

Opening and closing ........................... 67Operating system

see On-board computerOutside temperature display ........... 147Overhead control panel ...................... 32

PPaint code number ............................ 275Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 221Panic alarm .......................................... 54Parcel net ........................................... 197Parking ............................................... 127

Important safety notes .................. 127Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 89Rear view camera .......................... 140see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 162Electric parking brake .................... 129

Parking lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 93

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 139Driving system ............................... 137Function/notes ............................. 137Problem (malfunction) ................... 140Range of the sensors ..................... 138Warning display ............................. 138

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 42Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 225Power steering

Filling capacity ............................... 277Power washers .................................. 221

Index 11

Power windowssee Side windows

Product information ............................ 18Program selector ............................... 120Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 18Pulling away ...................................... 114

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 22

RRACE START ....................................... 121RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 157Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 151see separate operating instructions

Reading lamp ....................................... 95Rear spoiler

Display message ............................ 185Extending/retracting ..................... 206Problem ......................................... 208

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 224Function/notes ............................. 140

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) .......................... 87Dipping (automatic) ......................... 88

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 107Switching on/off ........................... 107

RefuelingFuel gauge ....................................... 27Important safety notes .................. 124Refueling process .......................... 125see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 208Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 209

Reporting safety defects .................... 23Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuelDisplay message ............................ 175Warning lamp ................................. 192see Fuel

Restraint systemsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 20Roof

see Soft topRoute

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 149

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 51Child restraint systems .................... 51Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 42Overview of occupant safetysystems ........................................... 36

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsBelt force limiters ............................ 50Cleaning ......................................... 226Correct usage .................................. 48Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 50Fastening ......................................... 49Important safety guidelines ............. 47Releasing ......................................... 49Safety guidelines ............................. 37Special seat belt retractor ............... 53Warning lamp ................................. 187Warning lamp (function) ................... 49see Seat belts

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 84Adjusting lumbar support ................ 84Cleaning the cover ......................... 226Correct driver's seat position ........... 82Important safety notes .................... 83Seat heating problem ...................... 85Storing settings (memoryfunction) .......................................... 89

12 Index

Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 85Switching seat heating on/off ......... 84

Selector leverPositions ........................................ 117

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 224Service interval display

Displaying service messages ......... 218Hiding service messages ............... 218Notes ............................................. 218Service messages .......................... 217

Service menu (on-board computer) . 153Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 280Capacities ...................................... 277Coolant (engine) ............................ 280Engine oil ....................................... 279Fuel ................................................ 277Important safety notes .................. 276Notes ............................................. 276Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 280Washer fluid ................................... 281

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 156On-board computer ....................... 153

Setting the air distribution ............... 105Setting the airflow ............................ 106SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 157Shift ranges ....................................... 122Side impact air bag ............................. 40Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 172Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 223Convenience closing feature ............ 75Convenience opening feature .......... 75Important safety information ........... 73Opening/closing .............................. 74Opening/closing (all) ....................... 75Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76

SmartKey ............................................. 67Changing the battery ....................... 64Changing the programming ............. 63Checking the battery ....................... 64Convenience closing feature ............ 75Convenience openingfeature ............................................. 75Display message ............................ 181

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 62Loss ................................................. 65Mechanical key ................................ 63Opening/closing soft top ................. 78Positions (ignition lock) ................. 113Problem (malfunction) ..................... 65Starting the engine ........................ 114Unlocking/locking vehicle ............... 67

SmartKey positionsKEYLESS-GO start function ............ 113

Snow chains ...................................... 250Socket

Glove box ....................................... 200Sockets

Center console .............................. 200Points to observe before use ......... 200

Soft topCleaning ......................................... 222Display message ............................ 180Important safety notes .................... 76Opening/closing (SmartKey) ........... 78Opening/closing (with soft-topswitch) ............................................. 77Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80Relocking ......................................... 78wind screen ..................................... 78

Soft-top switch .................................... 77Specialist workshop ............................ 22Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating theadditional speedometer ................. 154Digital ............................................ 149In the Instrument cluster ................. 27Selecting the unit ofmeasurement ................................ 153see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeWarning lamp ................................. 190

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 169Introduction ..................................... 36

Index 13

Warning lamp ................................. 190Warning lamp (function) ................... 36

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 172Switching on/off .............................. 94

Starting (engine) ................................ 114Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 86Button overview ............................... 29Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 147Cleaning ......................................... 225Important safety notes .................... 86Paddle shifters ............................... 121Storing settings (memoryfunction) .......................................... 89

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 157Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 197Center console .............................. 197Cup holders ................................... 198Glove box ....................................... 196Important safety information ......... 196Parcel net ...................................... 197Rear wall ........................................ 197

Stowage spaceCenter console (rear) ..................... 197

Summer openingsee Convenience opening feature

Summer tires ..................................... 250Sun visor ............................................ 198Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 155Suspension tuning

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 136

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 107Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 58

TTachometer ........................................ 146Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 171Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 27

Technical data ................................... 282Notes ............................................. 274Tires/wheels ................................. 270

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 205Display message ............................ 169Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 205Emergency call .............................. 202Important safety notes .................. 201Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 206MB info call button ........................ 204Remote vehicle locking .................. 205Roadside Assistance button .......... 203Search & Send ............................... 205Self-test ......................................... 201System .......................................... 201

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 152Menu (on-board computer) ............ 152Number from the phone book ........ 152Redialing ........................................ 153Rejecting/ending a call ................. 152

TemperatureCoolant (on-board computer) ......... 157Engine oil ....................................... 146Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 157Outside temperature ...................... 147

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 58Immobilizer ...................................... 58

Theft-deterrent systemsTow-away alarm ............................... 59

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 157TIREFIT kit .......................................... 229Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 255Checking manually ........................ 255Display message .................... 177, 179Maximum ....................................... 254Notes ............................................. 252Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 231Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 231Recommended ............................... 251see Tire pressure

14 Index

Tire pressure monitoring systemFunction/notes ............................. 255Restarting ...................................... 257Warning lamp ................................. 193

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 268Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 267Bar (definition) ............................... 266Characteristics .............................. 266Checking ........................................ 249Definition of terms ......................... 266Direction of rotation ...................... 270Display message ............................ 177Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 269DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 266DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 266GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 267GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 267GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 267Important safety notes .................. 248Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 267Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 268Labeling (overview) ........................ 263Load bearing index (definition) ...... 269Load index ..................................... 265Load index (definition) ................... 268Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 267Maximum load on a tire(definition) ..................................... 268Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 268Maximum tire load ......................... 261Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 268Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 269PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 268Replacing ....................................... 269Service life ..................................... 250

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 268Speed rating (definition) ................ 267Storing ........................................... 270Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 266Technical data ............................... 272Temperature .................................. 262TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 269Tire bead (definition) ...................... 268Tire pressure (definition) ................ 268Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 267Tire size (data) ............................... 270Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 263Tire tread ....................................... 249Tire tread (definition) ..................... 268Total load limit (definition) ............. 269Traction ......................................... 262Traction (definition) ....................... 269Tread wear ..................................... 262Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 261Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 267Unladen weight (definition) ............ 268Wear indicator (definition) ............. 269Wheel rim (definition) .................... 267see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 53Tow-away alarm .................................. 59Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 242Installing the towing eye ................ 243Removing the towing eye ............... 243With the rear axle raised ................ 243

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 244

TransmissionDriving tips .................................... 120Selector lever ................................ 117Shift range ..................................... 122

Transmission position display ......... 119Transmission positions .................... 119Transporting the vehicle .................. 244Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 225Trip computer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 148

Index 15

Trip odometerCalling up ....................................... 148Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 149see Trip odometer

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 73Important safety guidelines ............. 71Locking separately ........................... 72Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 72

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 180Opening/closing ........................ 71, 72

Trunk load (maximum)see Technical data

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 170Switching on/off .............................. 94see Turn signals

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 69From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 68

Upshift indicator ............................... 124

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 198Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 22Data acquisition ............................... 23Display message ............................ 180Equipment ....................................... 19Individual settings .......................... 153Limited Warranty ............................. 23Loading .......................................... 258Locking (in an emergency) ............... 70Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 62Lowering ........................................ 236Maintenance .................................... 20Parking for a long period ................ 130Raising ........................................... 233Reporting problems ......................... 22

Towing away .................................. 242Transporting .................................. 244Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 69Unlocking (SmartKey) ................ 62, 67

Vehicle datasee Technical data

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 283see Technical data

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 70Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 275Vehicle tool kit .................................. 228Vehicle weights

see Technical dataVideo (DVD) ........................................ 151VIN ...................................................... 275

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 189Brakes ................................... 186, 189Cruise control ................................ 135Engine diagnostics ......................... 191ESP® .............................................. 190Fuel tank ........................................ 192Overview .......................................... 28PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 42Reserve fuel ................................... 192Seat belt ........................................ 187SPORT handling mode ................... 190SRS ................................................ 190Tire pressure monitor .................... 193

Warranty ............................................ 275Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 181see Windshield washer system

Weightsee Technical data

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 236Wheel chock ...................................... 232Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 232Checking ........................................ 249Cleaning ......................................... 221Important safety notes .................. 248

16 Index

Interchanging/changing ................ 269Mounting a new wheel ................... 235Removing a wheel .......................... 235Storing ........................................... 270Tightening torque ........................... 236Wheel size/tire size ....................... 270

Windowssee Side windows

Windshield washer system .............. 217Filling capacity ............................... 282Notes ............................................. 281

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ..................... 99Replacing the wiper blades .............. 98Switching on/off .............................. 97

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 250Slippery road surfaces ................... 134Snow chains .................................. 250

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 251

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 223Important safety notes .................... 98Replacing ......................................... 98

Wooden trim (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 225Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 17

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of integratedenvironmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuelconsumption.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Environmental concerns andrecommendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usegenuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversionparts and accessories that have beenapproved for your vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well asconversion parts and accessories that havebeen specifically approved for your vehicle fortheir reliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Therefore,Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility forthe use of such parts in Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This is also the case, even if theyhave been independently or officiallyapproved. The use of non-approved partscould affect your vehicle's operating safety.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approvedconversion parts and accessories areavailable from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter. Here, you will receive advice aboutpermissible technical modifications, and theparts will be professionally installed.

18 Introduction

Operator's Manual

General notesBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthis manual. Disregarding them may lead todamage to the vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all features described.This also applies to safety-related systemsand functions. The equipment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from some of thedescriptions or illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Contact an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterif you have any questions about equipment oroperation.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Information for customers inCaliforniaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directly

Introduction 19

Z

notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USA

20 Introduction

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWork improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated software couldcause them to cease functioning. Because thevehicle's electronic components areinterconnected, any modifications made mayproduce an undesired effect on othersystems. Electronic malfunctions couldseriously impair the operating safety of yourvehicle.Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerfor repairs or modifications to electroniccomponents.Other improper work or modifications on thevehicle could also have a negative impact onthe operating safety of the vehicle.Some safety systems only function when theengine is running. You should therefore neverturn off the engine while driving.

G WARNINGHeavy blows against the vehicle underbody ortires/wheels may cause serious damage andimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Such blows can be caused, for example, byrunning over an obstacle, road debris or apothole.

If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that damageto your vehicle has occurred:Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.Rslow down carefully.Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safedistance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or otherqualified maintenance or repair facility forfurther inspection or repairs.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the two following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the on-boarddiagnostics connection, it can affect the

Introduction 21

Z

operation of the vehicle systems. This canimpair the operating safety of your vehiclewhile driving. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to the on-board diagnostics connection.

G WARNINGLoose equipment or equipment cables whichare connected to the on-board diagnosticsconnection can obstruct the area around thepedals. The equipment or the cables couldcome between the pedals in the event ofsudden braking or acceleration. This mayaffect the function of the pedals. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any equipment or cables in thedriver's footwell.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

The diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can, for example, lead toemissions monitoring information beingreset. This may lead to the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements of the next emissionstest during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance work

Rrepair workRalterations, installation work andmodificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct use

G WARNINGThere are various warning stickers affixed toyour vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you andothers to various dangers. Therefore, do notremove any warning stickers unless thesticker clearly states that you may do so.If you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangersand be injured.

When driving your vehicle observe thefollowing information:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

22 Introduction

98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Information on copyright

General informationYou can find information on licenses for freeand open-source software used in yourvehicle and its electronic components on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Your vehicle records electronic data. If yourvehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event ofan accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access this data and submitit:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosispurposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes thatinvolve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its salesand service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by law.Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.

Introduction 23

Z

24

Dashboard ........................................... 26Instrument cluster .............................. 27Multifunction steering wheel ............. 29Center console .................................... 30Overhead control panel ...................... 32Door control panel .............................. 33

25

Ataglance

Dashboard

Function Page: Cruise control lever 135

; Steering wheel paddleshifters 121

= Instrument cluster 27

? Overhead control panel 32

A PARKTRONIC display 138

B Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 86

Function PageC Combination switch 94

D Unlocks the trunk 72

E Diagnostics connection 21

F Opens the hood 214

G Electric parking brake 129

H Light switch 92

26 DashboardAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Overview

Function Page: Speedometer

; Upshift indicator 124

= Tachometer 146

? Engine oil temperaturedisplay 146

Function PageA Multifunction display 147

B Fuel gauge

Instrument cluster 27

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: ESP® 190

; Seat belts 187

= Brakes (USA only)J Brakes (Canada only)

? High-beam headlamps 94

A Low-beam headlamps 93

B Turn signal 94

C SRS 190

D Check Engine

E ABS 189

Function PageF Engine oil temperature 146

G Tire pressure 193

H Electric parking brake (USAonly)! Electric parking brake(Canada only)

I Reserve fuel 192

J SPORT handling mode 56

K ESP® OFF 56

28 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 147

; COMAND with display; seethe separate operatinginstructions

= 6~ Makes/acceptsor rejects/ends a call 152WX Increases/reduces volume8 Mute

? ?Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Function PageA % Back or deactivates

the Voice Control System

B =; Selects a menu 1479: Selects asubmenu or scrolls throughlistsa Confirms selectionsand hides displaymessages

Multifunction steering wheel 29

Ataglance

Center console

Upper section

Function Page: Controls COMAND; see the

separate operatinginstructions

; Adjusts AIRSCARF, left(Roadster only) 109

= Retracts/extends rearspoiler (vehicles with AMGadaptive sport suspensionsystem) 206

? Hazard warning lamps 94

A PARKTRONIC 139

Function PageB Adjusts AIRSCARF, right

(Roadster only) 109

C Seat heating, right 84

D 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 42

E Operates dual-zoneautomatic climate control 103

F Seat heating, left 84

30 Center consoleAt

aglance

Lower section

Function Page: AMG E-SELECT selector

lever 117

; COMAND controller

= Stowage compartment 19712 V socket 200Ashtray 199Cigarette lighter 199

? Stowage compartmentwithcup holder 197

A Soft top switch (Roadsteronly) 77

B Ignition lock (behindstowage space) 113

C Calls up/stores AMG menu(SETUP) 124

Function PageD Adjusts AMG adaptive

sport suspension system 136Retracts/extends rearspoiler (vehicles withoutAMG adaptive sportsuspension system) 206

E Activates/deactivatesESP® 56Activates/deactivatesSPORT handling mode 56

F Start/Stop button 113

G Selecting the drive program 120

H Parking lock button P 117

Center console 31

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page: p Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 95

; c Switches the interiorlighting on/off 96

= | Switches theautomatic interior lightingcontrol on/off 95

? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 95

A ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 204

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 202

Function PageC Rear-view mirror 87

D Transmitter buttons for thegarage door opener 208

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system)telephone and the VoiceControl System

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 203

32 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 68

; &% Locks/unlocksthe vehicle 68

= Z Selects the leftexterior mirror 87

? ª Folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 88

Function PageA \ Selects the right

exterior mirror 87

B 7 Adjusts the exteriormirrors 87

C W Opens/closes theside windows 74

Door control panel 33

Ataglance

34

Useful information .............................. 36Occupant safety .................................. 36Children in the vehicle ........................ 51Panic alarm .......................................... 54Driving safety systems ....................... 54Theft deterrent locking system ......... 58

35

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Occupant safety

IntroductionIn this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)Rair bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

The different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are deployedin an accident.

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deploy

inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 51) for more information oninfants and children traveling with you inthe vehicle and restraints for infants andchildren.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.SRS consists of:R6 SRS warning lampRair bagsRair bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning DevicesRseat belt force limiters

SRS warning lampSRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.

36 Occupant safetySafety

G WARNINGThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:Rdoes not light up at allRdoes not go out after approximately fourseconds after the engine is startedRcomes on after the engine was started orwhile driving.

For your safety, Mercedes-Benz stronglyrecommends that you have the systemchecked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. SRS may otherwisefail to activate when it is needed in the eventof an accident, which could lead to serious orfatal injuries. SRS might also be activatedunexpectedly and unnecessarily, which couldalso result in injury.In addition, work carried out improperly onSRS may render SRS inoperative or causeunintended air bag deployment. Work on theSRS system should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor details. USA only: for further informationcontact our Customer Assistance center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for the

environment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be madeto any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any componentor part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bagcover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupantsfree of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must be

Occupant safety 37

Safety

Z

followed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality rates in certainsituations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and knee bags)Rside impacts (head bags and side impact airbags)

However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder temporarily comes out ofthe air bags. This powder generally does notconstitute a health hazard and does notindicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. Inorder to prevent potential breathingdifficulties, you should leave the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. If you have anybreathing difficulty but cannot get out of thevehicle, then get fresh air by opening a sidewindow or door.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passenger

must always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back aspossible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches(25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury when the driver front airbag inflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door or the seat where thehead bag or side impact air bag inflates.This could result in serious injuries or deathshould the head bag or side impact air bagbe deployed. Always sit as upright as

38 Occupant safetySafety

possible, wear the seat belt properly anduse an appropriately sized infant restraint,toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of thechild.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGThere is a possibility of a head bag- or sideimpact air bag-related injury if occupants,especially children, are not properly seated orrestrained when next to a head bag or sideimpact air bag that needs to deploy rapidly ina side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children,should never place their bodies orlean their heads in the area of thedoor or the seat where the headbag or side impact air bag inflates.This could result in serious injuriesor death should the head bag orside impact air bag be deployed.

(2) Always sit as upright as possible,and use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelyinfant restraint, toddler restraintor booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child.

(3) Always wear seat belts properly.

If you believe that, even with the use of theseguidelines, it would be safer for yourpassenger seat occupants to have thepassenger side head bag or side impact airbag deactivated, then deactivation can becarried out upon your written request at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center at anadditional cost.

Please contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call the Customer AssistanceCenter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (inCanada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.

The air bags are only deployed if the air bagcontrol unit detects the need for deployment.Only in the event of such a situation, will theair bags provide their supplementalprotection.The driver and passenger should always weartheir seat belts. Otherwise it is not possiblefor the air bags to provide their supplementalprotection.In case of other types of impacts and impactsbelow air bag deployment thresholds, airbagswill not deploy. The driver and passengerwill then be protected to the extent possibleby a properly fastened seat belt. A properlyfastened seat belt is also needed to providethe best possible protection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of an accident.

Front air bagsThe front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox. They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending onwhether the seat belt is beingusedRindependently of other air bags in thevehicle

If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed. If the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. When the first deploymentthreshold is reached, the front air bag is filledwith enough propellant gas to reduce the riskof injuries. The front air bag is fully deployedif a second deployment threshold is exceededwithin a few milliseconds.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 42).The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.

The front-passenger front air bag will only bedeployed if:Rthe Occupant Classification System (OCS)has detected that the front-passenger seatis occupiedRthe 45 indicator lamp on the centerconsole is not litRthe air bag control unit predicts a high-impact severity.

Driver's/front-passenger knee bagThe driver and front-passenger knee bagsenhance the level of protection against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Driver's knee bag: deploys underneath thesteering column. Front-passenger kneebag; deploys underneath the glove box. If,during a frontal collision, the systemdetermines that air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, the knee bags are deployed alongwith the front air bags. The knee bags operatebest in conjunction with correctly positionedand fastened seat belts.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or door

40 Occupant safetySafety

trim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using other seat covers mayinterfere with or prevent the deployment ofthe side impact air bags. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center foravailability.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Example: Coupe

Side impact air bags: deploy next to theouter seat cushions.

The side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. They aredeployed if the system detects high vehicledeceleration or acceleration in a lateraldirection and determines that side impact airbag deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.If the OCS detects that the front-passengerseat is not occupied and the front-passengerseat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue isnot engaged in the seat belt buckle), the sideimpact air bag on the front-passenger sidewill not deploy. The side impact air bag on thefront-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Head bagsThe head bags enhance the level of protectionfor the head (but not chest or arms) of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

Example: Coupe

Headbags: deploy in the side window area.They are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRif the system determines that the vehicleoccupants are offered additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the ETDsRon the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystemdetermines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsHead bags: will not deploy in side impactswhich do not exceed the system's presetdeployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.If the OCS has classified the front-passengerseat as unoccupied and the front-passengerseat belt is not fastened, the head bag on thepassenger side will not deploy. The head bagon the front-passenger side will deploy if thefront-passenger seat belt is fastened,regardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupied or not.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the Occupant ClassificationSystem worksThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. Thefront-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivatedautomatically for certain weight categories.The 45 indicator lamp shows you thecurrent status. When the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated, the front-passenger frontair bag and the front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe front-passenger side impact air bagRthe front-passenger head bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorIf the front-passenger's weight is transferredto another object in the vehicle (e.g. byleaning on armrests), OCS may not be able toapproximate the occupant's weight category.To establish whether the front passenger isbeing properly detected, both the driver andthe front passenger should pay attention tothe 45 indicator lamp.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seataccessories that have been approved byMercedes-Benz.

42 Occupant safetySafety

G WARNINGIf the45 indicator lamp lights upwhenthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a larger person, ask the passenger toreposition themselves on the seat so that the45 indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger knee bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront-passenger occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint or if thefront-passenger seat is classified as beingunoccupied.If OCS has detected that the front passengerweighs the same as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraintsystem, the 45 indicator lamp lightsup when the engine is started and remains lit.This indicates that the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated.If OCS determines that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied, the 45 indicatorlamp lights up once the engine has beenstarted and remains lit. This shows that thefront-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated.If OCS determines that the front passengerweighsmore than a typical 12month old childin a standard child restraint system andclassifies this as a small person (e.g. ateenager or small adult), the 45indicator lamp lights up for approximately 6seconds when the engine is started.Depending on occupant weight sensorreadings from the seat, it will then remainilluminated or go out. If the 45indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Withthe 45 indicator lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passengerknee bag are deactivated.If OCS has determined that the frontpassenger is an adult ormediumsized person,the 45 indicator lamp lights up for

approximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then goes out. This shows that thefront-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front-passenger front air bag and thefront-passenger knee bag are deactivated andare not deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp does not lightup, the front-passenger air bag is enabled andwill be deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a preset deploymentthresholdRindependently of the other air bagsIf the front-passenger air bag is deployed, therate of inflation is influenced by:Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessedby the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asdetermined by the OCS

For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 167).

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt fully inaccordance with the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure the 45 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the45 indicator lampgoes out or remains out, do not transport achild on the front-passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.

RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than a typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagalso has to deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by a person with aweight of up to or less than that of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standardchild restraintRis occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adultRis occupied by a child in a child restraintsystem whose weight is greater than thatof a typical 12-month-old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bagand front-passenger knee bag. Deactivationtakes place although the collision fulfills thecriteria for deploying the driver's air bag.

If the SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock or has been set to position0with

44 Occupant safetySafety

the Start/Stop button, 45 indicatorlamp: does not light up.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should notposition him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in thischapter.

System self-testThe 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen you:Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lockRpress the Start/Stop button once or twiceIf an adult occupant is properly sitting on thepassenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adult, the45 indicatorlamp illuminates and goes out again afterapproximately 6 seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSclassifies the front passenger seat as beingunoccupied, the 45 indicator lampwill illuminate and not go out.

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on thepassenger seat.

For more information, see "Problems with theOccupant Classification System"(Y page 46).

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seatbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectlymounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The 45indicator lampilluminates andremains illuminated.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child.

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 167).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The 45indicator lamp does notilluminate and/or doesnot remain illuminated.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with aweight up to or lessthan a typical 12-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have theOCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat as long as the OCS is not functioning.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 167).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

46 Occupant safetySafety

Exiting in an emergency (Coupe only)If the vehicle is lying on its roof after anaccident, the hinge fasteners of the gullwingdoors are released pyrotechnically. You willhear a bang if this is the case. After thefasteners have been released, the doors areforced outwards. Simultaneously, the doorlocks are unlocked. The 6 SRS warninglamp lights up.

i The hinge fasteners are only releasedwhen the control unit recognizes thatcertain conditions have been fulfilled, e.g.when the vehicle is in a stabilized positionon its roof.

The doors can then be moved from theinside/outside by pulling the door handle.

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 51) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure your passenger is properlyrestrained. You and your passenger shouldalways wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt considerably increasesyour risk of injuries and their likely severity inan accident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuriescould be considerablymore severe if you havenot fastened your seat belt correctly. If you do

not fasten your seat belt, you are much morelikely to collide with parts of the vehicleinterior or be ejected from it. This may resultin serious or fatal injury.In the same crash, the possibility of serious orfatal injury is considerably reduced if youwearyour seat belt properly. The air bags can onlyoffer the intended protection if the occupantsare wearing their seat belts properly.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident mustbe replaced and their anchoring points mustalso be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when usedproperly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, knee bags, front-passenger front air bag, side impact airbags, head air bags), EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) and seat beltforce limiters. The system is designed toenhance the protection offered to properlybelted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags, knee bags and ETDs) and side (sideimpact air bags, head air bags and ETDs)impacts which exceed preset deploymentthresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder (it should nottouch the neck).RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across your

abdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid orbreakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

48 Occupant safetySafety

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, childrestraint system, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Example: CoupeX Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position(Y page 83).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sashguide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour hips.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecure child restraint systems properly on thefront-passenger seat. For further informationon special seat belt retractors, see(Y page 53).Formore information about releasing the seatbelt with release button?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 49).

Releasing seat beltsX Press release button?(Y page 49) andguide belt tongue;(Y page 49) backtowards belt sash guide:(Y page 49).

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out once the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone switchesoff after approximately six seconds or oncethe driver's seat belt is fastened.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains litas long as either the driver's or front-passenger's seat belt is not fastenedRand if a vehicle speed of 15 mph(25 km/h) is exceeded, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up and a warning tonealso sounds with increasing intensity for amaximum of 60 seconds or until the driveror front-passenger seat belt has beenfastened

If the driver or front-passenger seat belt isunfastened while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remains lit.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.

orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belt" (Y page 187).

Emergency Tensioning Devices and beltforce limitersThe seat belts are equipped with EmergencyTensioning Devices and seat belt forcelimiter.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-

passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.When triggered, the seat belt force limitershelp to reduce the peak force exerted by theseat belt on the vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiter are synchronizedwith the front air bags, which take on a partof the deceleration force. Thus, the forceexerted on the occupant is distributed over agreater area.When the ignition is switched on, the ETDscannot be triggered unless:Rthe restraint systems are operational; see"SRS warning lamp". (Y page 36)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the three-point seat belts.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied andthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side.

The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision, if the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRin the event of a side impact, if the vehicleis subjected to high lateral acceleration/decelerationRCoupe: in certain situations if the vehiclerolls over, and the system determines thatit can provide additional protectionRRoadster: if the vehicle rolls overIf the Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)are triggered, youwill hear a bang, and a smallamount of smoke may also be released. Onlyin rare cases will the bang affect your hearing.

50 Occupant safetySafety

The smoke that is released generally does notconstitute a health hazard. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic ETDs that were activatedmust bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment unless they arefirmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventof:Rstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Child restraint systems

Important safety notesWe recommend that all infants and childrenbe properly restrained using the childrestraint systems at all timeswhile the vehicleis in motion.The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Infants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. They must be properly secured inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions for the infant or childseat restraint system. All infant or childrestraint systems must comply with the U.S.Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 210.2.Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraint

Children in the vehicle 51

Safety

Z

system. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.When using any infant restraint, childrestraint or booster seat, make sure tocarefully read and follow all manufacturer'sinstructions for installation and use.Please read the warning labels affixed to theinterior of the vehicle or to the infant restraintor child restraints.

G WARNINGChildren under 12 years must be securedcorrectly in a suitable infant or child restraintsystem or booster seat suitable for the sizeand weight of the child.The infant or child restraint system must becorrectly secured using the vehicle's seat beltin complete accordance with the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.Occupants, in particular children, must sit asupright as possible, fasten the seat beltcorrectly and use a suitable infant restraintsystem, child restraint system or booster seatsuitable for the size and weight of the child.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Please observe thefollowing important information:Ryour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thepassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the passenger seat.Ra child in a rear-facing child restraint on thepassenger seat will be seriously injured oreven killed if the passenger front air baginflates in a collision which could occurunder some circumstances, even with theair bag technology installed in your vehicle.Rif you install a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passengerseat, make sure the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. If

the 45 indicator lamp does not lightup or goes out when the child restraintsystem is installed, check the anchoragesof the restraint system. Check the45 indicator lamp regularly whiledriving to ensure that the 45indicator lamp is illuminated. If the45 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, you may only carry a child onthe front-passenger seat once the systemhas been repaired.a child in a rear-facing child restraint on thepassenger seat will be seriously injured oreven killed if the passenger front air baginflates.Rwhen securing a child in a child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat, youmust:- move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible

- use a child restraint system that issuitable for the age, size and weight ofthe child

- observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions in order to install and securethe child restraint system correctly.

Rfor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. During anaccident, they could be crushed between theoccupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionthe shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until

52 Children in the vehicleSafety

they reach a height where a lap/shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

Special seat belt retractorThe seat belt on the front-passenger seat isequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When enabled, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt does not slackenonce the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

G WARNINGNever release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is inmotion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

Installing child restraint systemsObserve the "Important safety notes" section(Y page 51).The Top Tether anchorage is installed behindthe front-passenger seat.

X Slide the front-passenger seat forward.X Remove cover: from the Top Tetheranchorage in the direction of the arrow.

X Position Top Tether belt?. Comply withthe manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Hook Top Tether hook= into Top Tetheranchorage;.

Ensure that:RTop Tether hook= is hooked into TopTether anchorage; as shown.RTop Tether belt? is not twisted.When Top Tether hook= is connected, thechild restraint system can be secured.

Children in the vehicle 53

Safety

Z

X Install the child restraint system.X Tension Top Tether belt?. Comply withthe manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

The child restraint system with Top Tetherbelt? has been removed:X Slide cover: onto Top Tetheranchorage;.

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: forapproximately one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC regulations. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the key.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-Gen ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the key.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)REBD (electronic brake force distribution)RADAPTIVE BRAKE

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe following factors increase the risk ofaccidents:RExcessive speed, especially in turnsRWet and slippery road surfacesRFollowing another vehicle too closely

54 Driving safety systemsSafety

The driving safety systems described in thissection cannot reduce these risks or preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle. They cannot increase braking orsteering efficiency beyond that afforded bythe condition of the vehicle brakes and tiresor the traction afforded.Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with thedriving safety systems described in thissection must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopardizethe user's safety or the safety of others.Always adjust your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions andkeep a safe distance to other road users andobjects on the street.If a driving systemmalfunctions, other drivingsafety systems may also switch off. Observeindicator and warning lamps that may comeon as well as messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.

i In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDonot pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steadybrake pedal pressure instead. Pumping thebrake pedal reduces the braking effect.

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-

surface conditions. ABS works on slipperysurfaces, even if you only brake gently.The ! warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

G WARNINGIf the ABSmalfunctions, other driving systemssuch as the BAS or the ESP® are also switchedoff. Observe indicator and warning lamps thatmay come on as well as messages in themultifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing the steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)Observe the "Important safety notes" section(Y page 56).BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Driving safety systems 55

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the BASmalfunctions, the brake system stillfunctions, but without the additional brakeboost available that the BAS would normallyprovide in an emergency braking maneuver.Therefore, the braking distancemay increase.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 56).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 56).

Traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Switch the ignition off when:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedusing a brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with the rearaxle raised.

Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

When SPORT handling mode is activated, theMwarning lamp lights up in the instrumentpanel.When ESP® is deactivated, the å andhwarning lamps light up in the instrumentpanel.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 190) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 166).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.If ESP® intervenes, theh ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under anycircumstances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 54).

56 Driving safety systemsSafety

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding andaccidents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in thesituations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRwhen driving on designated roads when thevehicle's own oversteering andundersteering characteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up. The SPORT handlingSPORT handlingmodemodemessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out. ESP® is activated.

X To deactivate ESP®: press and hold downbutton: until theh and å warninglamps in the instrument panel light up.The OFFOFF message appears in themultifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: when SPORT handlingmode is activated or ESP® is deactivated,press button: briefly.Theh and å warning lamps in theinstrument cluster go out. The ONON messageappears in the multifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORThandling modeSPORT handling mode raises the interventionthreshold for stabilizing the vehicle. Thisallows for a sportier driving style ondesignated race circuits and may in certainsituations improve the traction in comparisonwith ESP®.If SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, thehwarning lamp in the instrument cluster

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

Z

flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.Rengine torque is only restricted to a limiteddegree, and the drive wheels are able tospin. The spinning wheels produce acutting effect for better traction.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, theh warning lamp in theinstrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin. The spinningwheels produce a cutting effect for bettertraction.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)Observe the "Important safety notes" section(Y page 56).EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

G WARNINGIf the EBDmalfunctions, the brake systemwillstill function with full brake boost. However,the rear wheels could lock up duringemergency braking situations, for example.You could lose control of the vehicle andcause an accident.

Adapt your driving style to the changeddriving characteristics.

ADAPTIVE BRAKEObserve the "Important safety notes" section(Y page 54).ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also features the hill start assistfunction (Y page 115). For furtherinformation, see Driving tips (Y page 131).

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theengine off and open the driver's door.

X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe trunk lid

58 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Rthe hoodRRoadster: the glove boxRRoadster: a compartment in the centerconsoleRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem1 automatically initiates a call to theCustomer Assistance center. The mbraceemergency call system initiates the call if:Ryou have subscribed to the mbraceserviceRthe mbrace service has been activatedproperlyRthe requiredmobile phone, power supplyand GPS are available.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with theSmartKey.The turn signal lamps flash three times andan acoustic warning sounds three times toindicate that the vehicle is locked. Flashingindicator lamp: indicates that the alarmsystem is armed.i If the turn signal lamps do not flash threetimes and the warning tone does not soundthree times, a door or the trunk lid may notbe properly closed.

It may be necessary to close the affecteddoor or trunk lid.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.The turn signal lamps flash once and awarning tone sounds once, indicating thatthe alarm system is disarmed.i Unless you open a door or the trunkwithinapproximately 40 seconds after unlocking:Rthe vehicle will be locked againRthe alarm system will be rearmed

X To stop the alarm: press the Start/Stopbutton in the center console. The SmartKeymust be inside the vehicle.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

Tow-away alarmAn audible and visual alarm is triggered if yourvehicle's angle of inclination is altered whilethe tow-away alarm is armed. This occurs ifthe vehicle is jacked up on one side, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than 30seconds, the mbrace2 system initiates acall to the Customer Assistance Centerautomatically. The emergency call systeminitiates the call provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbraceserviceRthe mbrace service has been activatedproperlyRthe requiredmobile phone, power supplyand GPS are available.

1 The system is called Tele Aid in Canada.2 TELEAID in Canada.

Theft deterrent locking system 59

Safety

Z

X To arm: lock the vehicle with theSmartKey.The tow-away alarm is armed afterapproximately 30 seconds.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.The tow-away alarm is deactivatedautomatically.

To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the tow-away alarm manually if your vehicle:Ris being transportedRis being loaded onto a ferry or cartransporter, for exampleRis parked on a movable surface, e.g. in asplit-level garage

X To deactivate: use the Start/Stop buttonto set SmartKey position 0.

orX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up briefly.

X Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.The tow-away alarm is deactivated.The tow-away alarm remains deactivateduntil the vehicle is unlocked and lockedagain.

60 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Useful information .............................. 62SmartKey ............................................. 62Doors .................................................... 67Trunk .................................................... 71Side windows ...................................... 73Soft top (Roadster) ............................. 76

61

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

SmartKey

Key function

General notesi USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

Locking/unlocking centrallyThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapRRoadster only: the glove boxRRoadster only: the stowage compartmentunder the armrest

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen a door locked from inside the vehicleRstart the vehicle using a keywhich has beenleft in the vehicleRrelease the parking brakeThey could thereby endanger themselves andothers. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle. Always take the key with youwhen leaving the vehicle, even if you are onlyleaving it for a short time.

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicle

The turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.

62 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 155).You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked or unlocked.The audible signal can be activated anddeactivated using the on-board computer(Y page 156).X To unlock centrally: press the%button.

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe anti-theft alarm system is armed again.X To lock centrally: press the& button.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the setting of the lockingsystem in such a way that only the driver'sdoor and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Thisis useful if you frequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lamp(Y page 64) flashes twice.

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 58).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notesHave the batteries changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic substances.Swallowing batteries can lead to serioushealth issues or death.

SmartKey 63

Openingandclosing

Z

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.Seek medical attention immediately if abattery is swallowed.

G WARNINGThe SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Observegovernment disposal guidelines. Californiaresidents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The SmartKey battery is working properly ifbattery check lamp: lights up briefly.

If battery check lamp: does not light upbriefly during the test, the SmartKey batteryis discharged.X Changing the battery (Y page 64)

i The battery can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button locks or unlocks thevehicle.

Replacing the batteryX Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 63).

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover: opens. Donot hold the cover closed while doing so.

X Remove the cover of the battery tray.X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Insert the front tabs of the battery tray'scover first, and then press to close it.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

64 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle fromclose range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.

If this does not work:X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 63).X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary(Y page 64).

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key(Y page 63).

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey canceled at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

SmartKey 65

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, such as seat heating orinterior lighting, and try to start the engine again.

X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Start the engine within 30 seconds of inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.

X Repeat if necessary.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 236).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 240).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The SmartKey cannotbe turned in the ignitionlock.

The SmartKey has been in position 0 for a considerable time.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 236).

X Start the engine.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off nonessential consumers, such as seat heating orinterior lighting, and try to turn the SmartKey again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 236).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 240).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

66 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Unlocking and opening the doorsfrom the outside

Coupe! The doors swing upwards and out whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the vehicle.

X To open the door: point the SmartKeytowards door handle:.

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.Door handle: moves out.

X Lift the door by door handle: and swingit up as far as it will go.

X To close the door: pull the doordownwards by the outer edge or the interiordoor handle. Swing the door down gentlyand allow it to engage in the lower position.

X Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey ifnecessary (Y page 62).

RoadsterX To open the door: point the SmartKeytowards door handle.

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X Pull the door handle.

Doors 67

Openingandclosing

Z

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

CoupeYou can only open a door from the inside if itis unlocked.The vehicle locks the doors automatically,when you drive faster than 9 mph(15 km/h).The doors are automatically unlocked after ajourney if you switch off the engine.

! The doors swing upwards and out whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the vehicle.

X To unlock the door manually: pressthe% button of central locking=.

orX Pull locking knob: upwards.X To open the door: pull handle;.X Swing the door upwards as far as it will go.X To close the door: pull the door down byhandle?.

X Allow the door to engage in the lowerposition.

X To lock the door manually: pressthe& button of central locking=.

orX Push locking knob: downwards.

RoadsterYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.

Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

i When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the triangular window closesagain.

! The side windows will not open/close ifthe battery is discharged or if the sidewindows have iced up. It will then not bepossible to close the door. Do not attemptto force the door closed. You couldotherwise damage the door or the sidewindow.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This feature may be useful if,for example, you wish to unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock thevehicle before you pull away.Coupe: the central locking/unlocking buttondoes not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.Roadster: the central locking/unlockingbutton does not lock or unlock the fuel fillerflap or the stowage compartments, such asthe glove box.

68 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X To lock: press button;.If both doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

X To unlock: press button:.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. Only open the doorwhen the traffic situation permits.If the vehicle has been locked with the centrallocking button:Rand the SmartKey is set to its factorysetting, the entire vehicle is unlocked if adoor is opened from the insideRand the SmartKey is set to an individualsetting, only the door that is opened frominside the vehicle is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

CoupeYou can only open a door from the inside if itis unlocked.The vehicle locks the doors automatically,when you drive faster than 9 mph(15 km/h).The doors are automatically unlocked after ajourney if you switch off the engine.

RoadsterThe vehicle locks automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels of thevehicle are moving at a speed of more than9 mph (15 km/h). There is therefore a risk ofbeing locked out when the vehicle is beingpushed, towed or tested on a dynamometer.

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 155).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 58).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 63).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

Doors 69

Openingandclosing

Z

Coupe

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock of the driver's door as far as it willgo.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise toposition2.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X To open the door: press button:.The handle moves out slightly from thedoor.

X Pull the handle out as far as it will go.X Swing the door upwards by the handle.

Roadster

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.

Coupe

: Button for extending the handleX To lock: lock the front-passenger doormanually from the inside (Y page 68).

X Leave the vehicle and close the driver'sdoor.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position3.The door is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Check that both doors are locked.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

RoadsterX Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door and thetrunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 68).X Check that the locking knob is in the lowerposition on the front-passenger door. Pressthe locking knob down by hand, ifnecessary.

X Close the driver's door.

70 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 63).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

: Button for extending the handleX Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

! The temperature in the trunkmay be high.For this reason, do not store anytemperature-sensitive objects in the trunk.

Trunk 71

Openingandclosing

Z

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

Coupe: to fully open the trunk lid, a minimumheight of 5.5 ft (1.68 m) from the ground isnecessary.Roadster: to fully open the trunk lid, aminimum height of 5.7 ft (1.75 m) from theground is necessary.The trunk lid can be:Ropened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Opening/closing the trunk

Opening/closing from outside

OpeningX Press theF button on the SmartKey.The trunk lid opens slightly.

X Reach into the gap and pull up the trunk lid.

ClosingG WARNINGTo prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the trunkopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound.

X Push the trunk lid down until it engages.Use handle: to pull down the trunk lid ifnecessary.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the& button on the SmartKey.

Opening the trunk from inside thevehicleYou can open the tailgate from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary.

X Press trunk lid remote control button:.The trunk lid opens slightly.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 63).

72 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

X Insert the mechanical key fully into trunklid lock: in the rear compartment of thecenter console.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras possible.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Check that the trunk remains locked whenyou press on the trunk lid remote controlbutton.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)If the trunk can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey:X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 63).

X Insert the mechanical key fully into trunklid lock: in the center console in thevehicle interior.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as possible.The trunk lid opens slightly.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Briefly press emergency releasebutton:.The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.

X Push the trunk lid upwards to open itcompletely.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunklid emergency release when the vehicle isstationary or while driving.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.Remergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

The trunk lid emergency release does notunlock the trunk lid if the battery isdisconnected or discharged.If the vehicle was locked centrally, openingthe trunk lid with the trunk lid emergencyrelease triggers the anti-theft alarm system.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the side windows,make sure that nobody can be injured by theopening or closing procedure.The side windows are equipped withautomatic operation and anti-entrapment

Side windows 73

Openingandclosing

Z

features. If, in automatic operation mode, aside window encounters an obstruction thatblocks its path, the anti-entrapment featurewill stop the side window and open it slightly.The side windows operate differently whenthe switch is pulled and held. These detailscan be found in the "Closing a blocked sidewindow" section in this chapter.The closing of the side windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switch or,if the switch was pulled past the resistancepoint and released, by pressing or pulling therespective switch.If a side window encounters an obstructionthat blocks its path when you are closing theside windows by pressing and holding the& button on the SmartKey, the anti-entrapment feature will not operate.

G WARNINGDo not keep any part of your body up againstthewindowpanewhen opening awindow. Thedownward motion of the pane may pull thatpart of your body down between the windowpane and the door frame and trap it there. Ifthere is a risk of entrapment, release theswitch and pull it to close the window.

Observe the important safety notes in the"Children in the vehicle" section (Y page 51).

Opening and closing the sidewindows

: Left side window; Right side window

The switches for both side windows arelocated on the driver's door. There is also aswitch for the front-passenger side windowon the front-passenger door.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 113).

X To open: press corresponding switch:or;.

X To close: pull corresponding switch:or;.i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine.This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

74 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing all side windows(Roadster)

Using the SmartKey

G WARNINGMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close the side windows.Proceed as follows if there is a risk ofentrapment:Rrelease the& button.Rpress and hold the% button until theside windows open again.

If the soft top is closed, you can use theSmartKey to simultaneously open or close allof the side windows:X Make sure that the soft top is closed(Y page 77).

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X To open all side windows: pressthe% button on the SmartKey until theside windows are fully opened.

X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.

X To close all side windows: press the& button on the SmartKey until the sidewindows are fully closed.

X To interrupt the closing procedure:release the& button.

Convenience opening (Coupe)

G WARNINGWhen closing the side windows, make surethere is no danger of anyone being harmed bythe closing procedure.Proceed as follows in a potentially dangeroussituation:RRelease the& button to interrupt theclosing procedure.RPress and hold the& button to open. Tocontinue the closing procedure after

ensuring that nobody can be injured by theclosing procedure, press and hold the& button.

When you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously close both side windows fromoutside.

i The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Lock the vehicle with the& button.X Press and hold the& button until theside windows are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

Convenience closing (Coupe)You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do so, open the sidewindowsusingthe SmartKey.

i The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the%button.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows are in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Side windows 75

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window will notclose.

Objects prevent it from closing.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window will notclose.

You cannot see the cause.If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

G WARNINGPulling and holding the switch to close the doorwindow immediatelyafter it had been blocked two times will cause the door window toclose without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you holdthe switch.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Soft top (Roadster)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOnly drive with the soft top fully open orclosed.If the soft top does not open or close fully, thesoft-top hydraulics are depressurized and thesoft top is lowered:Rafter about seven minutes if the ignition isswitched onRimmediately if the ignition is switched offA warning tone sounds shortly beforehand.The Top loweringTop lowering message appears in themultifunction display..Lock the soft top again before driving on.Otherwise the unlocked soft top could open

during the journey and cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle. You and/or otherpersons could be injured as a result.

You can open or close the soft top:Rif the vehicle is stationary orRif the speed does not exceed 30 mph(50 km/h)

If there is a strong head wind, it may not bepossible to close the soft top fully. In order toclose the soft top fully, reduce speed or stop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only open or close thesoft top when the vehicle is stationary.

! Never sit on the soft top when it is closedor store heavy objects on it. You will

76 Soft top (Roadster)Op

eningandclosing

otherwise damage the soft top of thevehicle.

! When opening and closing the soft top,make sure that:Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, asthe soft top swings upwards.Rthere are no objects on the soft top orthe soft-top covers to the side.Rthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozenRthe outside temperature is above -10 †.You could otherwise damage the soft topas well as other parts of the vehicle.

i Make sure that the soft top is dry andclean before closing it. Otherwise, water ordirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk.

Opening and closing with the soft topswitch

Important safety notes

G WARNINGMake sure nobody can be trapped or injuredby moving parts, such as the soft-top linkageor soft-top compartment cover, when openingor closing the soft top.Release the soft-top switch in the event ofdanger. The soft-top mechanism stopsimmediately.

G WARNINGThe soft top stops moving during the openingor closing procedure if you drive faster than30mph (50 km/h). This could impair your rearview. At high speeds the soft top may bedamaged.Reduce your speed to below 30 mph(50 km/h) or stop in accordance with trafficconditions. Press the soft-top switch again inorder to open or close the soft top fully.

Opening and closingX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Select key position 1 using the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 113).

X To open: pull soft-top switch: until thesoft top is fully opened.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If, when opening, you drive at speeds above30 mph (50 km/h), the opening procedureis stopped and in the multifunction displayyou see the Open/Close ConvertibleOpen/Close ConvertibleTop CompletelyTop Completely message. Reduce yourspeed again to below 30 mph (50 km/h)and pull the soft-top switch again to openthe soft top fully.

X To close: press and hold soft-topswitch: until the soft top is fully closed.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If, when closing, you drive at speeds above30 mph (50 km/h), the closing procedureis stopped and in the multifunction displayyou see the Open/Close ConvertibleOpen/Close ConvertibleTop CompletelyTop Completely message. Reduce speedback to under 30 mph (50 km/h) and pushthe soft top switch again to fully close thesoft top.

Soft top (Roadster) 77

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening and closing using theSmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGMake sure nobody can be trapped or injuredby moving parts, such as the soft-top linkageor soft-top compartment cover, when openingor closing the soft top.If there is a risk of entrapment, immediatelyrelease the% or& button on theSmartKey. The soft-top mechanism stopsimmediately.

Opening and closingi The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X To open: press and hold the% buttonon the SmartKey until the soft top is fullyopened.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To close: press and hold the& buttonon the SmartKey until the soft top is fullyclosed.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The soft top and the side windowsclose.

Relocking the soft top

G WARNINGStop the vehicle at a suitable location as soonas it is possible to do so safely and lock thesoft top before driving on. You couldotherwise endanger yourself and others.

The soft top is not locked if:Rthe Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Ryou hear a warning tone for up to tensecondswhen pulling away orwhile driving.

You can lock the soft top again if it is notlocked fully.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 113).

X Press the soft-top switch.

Installing/removing the wind screen

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle andinjure yourself or others if you operate thewind screen while driving.Install or remove the wind screen only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the wind screen is not properly engaged andthe fastening levers are not folded outwards,it could become detachedwhile driving. Thereis a risk of accident and injury.Make sure that you push in the wind screenup to the locking point and then fold thefastening levers outwards.

! Install or remove the wind screen onlywhen the soft top is open. You couldotherwise damage the wind screen or thevehicle interior.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wind screens which have beentested and approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This helps to prevent damage tothe vehicle.

78 Soft top (Roadster)Op

eningandclosing

The wind screen protects against wind whendriving with the soft top open. It is securedbetween the roll bars.The wind screen is in a bag on the tankpartition wall in the trunk.X Open the trunk.

X Detach wind screen bag: from fourpress-studs; on the tank partition wall.

X Remove the wind screen from wind screenbag:.

X Attach wind screen bag: to the tankpartition wall again.

X To install: fold both fastening levers;inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Push wind screen: into the recessbetween the roll bars up to the lockingpoint.

X Fold both fastening levers; outwards.X To remove: fold both fastening levers;inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Pull wind screen: upward.

X Detach thewind screen bag, remove it fromthe trunk and put the wind screen back intoit.

X Attach the wind screen bag to the tankpartition wall in the trunk again.

Soft top (Roadster) 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the soft top

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The soft top will notopen or close.

Key position 1 is not selected.X Select key position 1 using the Start/Stop button.

The brake pedal has not been depressed with the vehiclestationary.X Depress the brake pedal.

The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.The soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safetyreasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

80 Soft top (Roadster)Op

eningandclosing

Useful information .............................. 82Correct driver's seat position ............ 82Seats .................................................... 83Steering wheel .................................... 86Mirrors ................................................. 87Memory function ................................. 89

81

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Correct driver's seat position

Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 83).X Make sure that seat= is adjustedproperly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 84)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal uprightposition.

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle sothat your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 86).X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 86)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in theinstrument cluster clearly.

Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 47).X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 49).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across thehip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirror and the exterior mirrors(Y page 87) in such a way that you havea good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings (Y page 89).

82 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIn order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, the followingmust be done before thevehicle is put into motion:Rseat adjustmentRsteering wheel adjustmentRrear-view mirror adjustmentRfastening of seat belts

G WARNINGIn order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, all seat, head restraint, steeringwheel and rear view mirror adjustments, aswell as fastening of seat belts, must be donebefore setting the vehicle in motion.

G WARNINGDo not adjust the driver's seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. This could cause serious orfatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat beltsprovide the best restraint when the wearer isin a position that is as upright as possible andseat belts are properly positioned on thebody.

G WARNINGYour seat belt must be adjusted so that youcan correctly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:Radjust the seat backrest until your arms areslightly angled when holding the steeringwheel.Radjust the seat to a comfortable seatingposition that still allows you to reach the

accelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possiblewith the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.Radjust the head restraint so that it is asclose to the head as possible and the centerof the head restraint supports the back ofthe head at eye level.Rnever place hands under the seat or nearany moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGThe electrically adjustable seats can beoperated at any time. Therefore, do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. A child'sunsupervised access to a vehicle could resultin an accident and/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see section "Children in thevehicle".A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not to be used to drythe seats.

Seats 83

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! When youmove the seats, make sure thatthere are no objects in the footwell orbehind the seats. Otherwise, you coulddamage the seats and the objects.

Seat adjustment

: Backrest angle; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment= Seat cushion angle? Seat height

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 89).

Adjusting the lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the seat so asto provide optimum support for your back.

: To adjust the upper back support; To adjust the contour of the backrest in

the lumbar region= To adjust the lateral structure and support

of the seatX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

i If, after a certain amount of time, the seatno longer has the desired contour, repeatthe adjustment.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly setting the seat heating to level3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.The health of passengers that have limitedtemperature sensitivity or a limited ability toreact to excessively high temperatures maybe affected or they may even suffer burn-likeinjuries. Therefore, do not use seat heatinglevel 3 repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

84 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximately fiveminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, theseat heating will switch back onautomatically.

AIRSCARF (Roadster)

G WARNINGVery hot air can flow out of the AIRSCARFvents in the head restraints when AIRSCARFis in operation. This can cause burns onunprotected skin near the AIRSCARF vents.Make sure that you reduce the heater outputin time.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head andneck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.Thewarmair flows out of the holes in the headrestraints.The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.

X To activate: press button:.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until thedesired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

You can use the adjustable fins on the headrestraint to adjust the height of the current ofair blown out according to your height.Make sure that there are no objects coveringthe intake grille on the back of the driver'sseat backrest.

i The blower continues running for sevenseconds to cool down the heatingelements.

Seats 85

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARFmay switch off.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not adjust the steeringwheel while driving.Adjusting the steering wheel while drivingcould cause the driver to lose control of thevehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child's unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel position(fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Other topics:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 86)RStoring settings (Y page 89)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notesThe EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 156).

G WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment stalk or press thememory position switch.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGLet the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle inmotion. Driving off with the steering wheelstill adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the KEYLESS-GO start function in position 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

86 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou press the Start/Stop button once.When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored after each manual setting or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 89).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glareswitch: forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGExercise care when using the passenger-sideexterior rear view mirror. The mirror surfaceis convex (outwardly curved surface for awider field of view). Objects in mirror arecloser than they appear. Check your interiorrear view mirror and glance over yourshoulder before changing lanes.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are heated automaticallyif the rear window defroster is switched onand the outside temperature is low. Mirrorheating lasts up to 10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

X Select SmartKey position 1 or 2 with theStart/Stop button.

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjusted

Mirrors 87

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

the exterior mirror to the desired position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Select SmartKey position 1 or 2 with theStart/Stop button.

X Briefly press button?.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while the vehicle isin motion, as they may otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer foldin the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 156).X Select SmartKey position 1 using theStart/Stop button.

X Briefly press button?.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 156):

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i The mirrors do not fold out if they havebeen folded in manually.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically foldingexterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button until you hear a click andthen the mirrors engage in position(Y page 88).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 87).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGIf incident light from headlamps is preventedfrom striking the sensor in the rear-viewmirror, for instance, by luggage piled too highin the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-glare function will not operate.Incident light could then blind you. This maydistract you from the traffic conditions and,as a result, you may cause an accident.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

88 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Calling up a stored parking positionsettingX Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side with the correspondingbutton (Y page 87).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 6 mph(10 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you havedisengaged reverse gearRif you press button: for the exteriormirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGDo not activate the memory function whiledriving. Activating the memory function whiledriving could cause the driver to lose controlof the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat and backrest positionRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exteriormirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

Memory function 89

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 84).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 86) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 87).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,steering wheel and exterior mirrors are inthe stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

90 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information .............................. 92Exterior lighting .................................. 92Interior lighting ................................... 95Replacing bulbs ................................... 96Windshield wipers .............................. 97

91

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Notes on driving abroadConverting to symmetrical low beamwhen driving abroad: switch the headlampsto symmetrical low beam in countries inwhich traffic drives on the opposite side of theroad to the country where the vehicle isregistered. This prevents glare to oncomingtraffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminateas large an area of the edge of the road.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, as close to the borderas possible before driving in these countries.Converting to asymmetrical low beamafter returning: have the headlampsconverted back to asymmetrical low beam ata qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorizedMercedes-BenzCenter, as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 94)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 154)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0.

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or other

92 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

causes of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada. It cannot therefore bedeactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, you turn on thedaytime running lamps and parking lamps.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:

The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the daytime running lamps functionmustbe switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 154).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

i In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid the

Exterior lighting 93

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

continuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn light switch to T.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Right turn signal= High-beam flasher? Left turn signalX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.In theà position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in thedirection of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

94 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployedRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill.

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warninglamps: press button:.

The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle exceeds a speedof 6 mph(10 km/h) again after a full brakeapplication.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated five times (Y page 97) while thelights are on and the engine is running. Whenyou switch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset andcounting is resumed from 0.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off; p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off= c Switches the interior lighting on/off? p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

Interior lighting 95

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 155).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the c button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using thekey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electricalcontacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have workon the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to be

observed, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 97). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Changing the front bulbsYou cannot replace the bulbs at the frontyourself. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommends that

96 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.

Changing the rear bulbs

License plate lampThe only rear bulbs you can change are theW 5 W license plate lamp bulbs.

X Switch off the lights.X Lever lamp housing: out of the frameusing a screwdriver.

X Unscrew the bulb holder from the lamphousing and pull out the bulb.

X Insert a new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew the bulb holder into the lamphousing.

X Press the lamp housing back into the frameuntil it engages.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

G WARNINGThe windshield will not longer be wipedproperly if the wiper blades are worn. Thiscould prevent you from observing the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideallyin spring and fall.

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low3

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high4

4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/ î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to thecorresponding position.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.

3 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.4 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.

Windshield wipers 97

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wiper arms could start moving and causean injury if you leave the windshield wipersswitched on.Remove the key from the ignition lock beforereplacing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades replaced by a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesMoving the wiper arm to a verticalpositionX Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wiper to the °position.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wipers start.

X When the wiper arms have reached avertical position, press the Start/Stopbutton.

X Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

Removing the wiper blades

X Remove the wiper blade from the retaineron the wiper arm in the direction of thearrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Slide the new wiper blade into the retaineron the wiper arm in the opposite directionto the arrow.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiperarm.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

98 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructedLeaves or snow, for example, may beobstructing the windshield wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stopbutton and open the driver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperativeThe windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on thecombination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

The spray nozzles are misalignedThe windshield washer fluid from the spraynozzles no longer hits the center of thewindshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at aqualified specialist workshop.

The wiper arms are on the windshieldThe wiper arms have been moved by anexternal force.X Select key position 2 (ignition) with theStart/Stop button.The wiper arms move back downautomatically.

Windshield wipers 99

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

100

Useful information ............................ 102Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 102Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 104Setting the air vents ......................... 108

101

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. A cloggedfilter will reduce the air volume to the interiorand the windows could fog up, impairingvisibility and endangering you and others.Have a blocked filter replaced at a Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGFollow the recommended settings for heatingand cooling given on the following pages.Otherwise, the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering you andothers.

The automatic climate control regulates thetemperature and the humidity in the vehicleinterior and filters undesirable substancesout of the air.Coupe: the automatic climate control is onlyoperational if the engine is running. Optimumoperation is achieved only when you drivewith the side windows closed.Roadster: the automatic climate control isonly operational if the engine is running. The

system only works optimally when the sidewindows and the roof are closed.

i Coupe: ventilate the vehicle for a briefperiod during warm weather. This willspeed up the cooling process and thedesired vehicle interior temperature will bereached more quickly.Roadster: ventilate the vehicle for a briefperiod during warm weather. This willspeed up the cooling process and thedesired vehicle interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the MaintenanceBooklet.

102 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual zone automatic climate control

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 105); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 105)= To switch climate control on/off (Y page 104)? To switch the MONO function on/offA To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 104)B To defrost the windshield (Y page 106)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 107)D To set the temperature, right (Y page 105)E To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)F To increase the airflow (Y page 106)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 106)H DisplayI To set the air distribution (Y page 105)

USA only: To set the temperature, left; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 105)= To switch climate control on/off (Y page 104)? To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 106)A To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 104)

Overview of climate control systems 103

Climatecontrol

Z

B To defrost the windshield (Y page 106)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 107)D To set the temperature, right (Y page 105)E To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)F To increase the airflow (Y page 106)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 106)H DisplayI To set the air distribution (Y page 105)

Notes on using automatic climatecontrolThe following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps intheà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the defrosting function brieflyuntil the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the MONO function if you want toadopt the temperature and air distributionsettings from the driver's side for allclimate control zones. The indicator lampin theº button lights up.

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

G WARNINGWhen the climate control system isdeactivated, the outside air supply andcirculation are also deactivated. Only choosethis setting for a short time. Otherwise thewindows could fog up, impairing visibility andendangering you and others.

i Switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 105).

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

Points to observe before useThe cooling with air dehumidification functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

104 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the "cooling with airdehumidification" functionWhen you press the¿ button, theindicator lamp in the button flashes threetimes or remains off. You can no longer switchon the cooling with air dehumidificationfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

In automatic mode, the set temperature iscontrolled automatically. The systemautomatically regulates the temperature ofthe dispensed air, the airflow and the airdistribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimaloperation if cooling with air dehumidificationis also activated. If necessary, cooling with airdehumidification can be deactivated.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To select manually: press theÃbutton.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperatureDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To increase/reduce: turn control: andD clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 103).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution¯ Directs the airflow through the

defroster ventsP Directs the airflow through the center

and side air ventsO Directs the airflow through the

footwell air ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and side air vents as well as thefootwell air vents

_ Directs the airflow to the entire vehicleinterior

b Directs the airflow through the centerand side air vents, as well as thedefroster vents

a Directs the airflow through thefootwell and defroster vents

Operating the climate control systems 105

Climatecontrol

Z

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic control is deactivated andthe air distribution is controlled accordingto the selected setting.

Setting the airflowX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.

Switching the mono function on/offThe MONO function is only available invehicles for Canada.You can use the MONO function to adopt thetemperature and air distribution settings onthe driver's side for the front-passenger side.X Press theº button.The indicator lamp in theº button lightsup or goes out.

Defrosting the windshieldi You should only select the defrostingfunction until the windshield is clear again.

X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The system automatically switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn controls: orD clockwise orcounter-clockwise (Y page 103).

orX Press theK orI button.

Switching maximum cooling on/offThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode onX To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ buttonagain.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previously selected settings come intoeffect again.i To deactivate MAX COOL press the^,Ã, or¬ button.

106 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic mode.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe defrosting function.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theO orP symbol appears in thedisplay.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the rear window before driving.Visibility could otherwise be impaired,endangering you and others.

The rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Problems with the rear windowdefrosterThe rear window defroster has deactivatedprematurely or cannot be activated. The on-board voltage is too low because too manyelectrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting.When the battery is sufficiently charged,the rear window defroster is activatedagain automatically.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation modeYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.

G WARNINGFogged windows impair visibility,endangering you and others. If the windowsbegin to fog on the inside, switching off theair recirculation mode immediately shouldclear interior window fogging. If interiorwindow fogging persists, make sure the airconditioning is activated, or press the¬button.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outsidetemperatures.When air-recirculationmodeis activated automatically, the indicatorlamp in theg button is not lit.Outside air is added after about 30minutes.

Operating the climate control systems 107

Climatecontrol

Z

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes atoutside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes ifcooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes atoutside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5†) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature). Thiscould cause burns or frostbite to unprotectedskin in the immediate area of the air vents.Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents in thevehicle interior that are not in the immediatearea of unprotected skin.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet on the right-hand side ofthe hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

1 To open the center air vent2 To close the center air vent= Center air vent, right? Center air vent, leftX To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in center air vent= or? in thedirection of the arrow to position1.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in center air vent= or? in thedirection of the arrow to position2.

Setting the side air vents

1 To open the side air vent2 To close the side air vent= Side window defroster vent? Side air vent

108 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

X To open the side air vent: turn theadjuster in side air vent? in the directionof the arrow to position1.

X To close the side air vent: turn theadjuster in side air vent? in the directionof the arrow to position2.

Setting the AIRSCARF vents(Roadster)

G WARNINGWhen operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature). Thiscould cause burns or frostbite to unprotectedskin in the immediate area of the air vents.Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents in thevehicle interior that are not in the immediatearea of unprotected skin.

You can adjust the blower output ofAIRSCARF vents: using the AIRSCARFbutton (Y page 85).

Setting the air vents 109

Climatecontrol

Z

110

Useful information ............................ 112Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 112Driving ............................................... 112AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speedsports transmission ......................... 117AMG button (SETUP) ......................... 124Refueling ............................................ 124Parking ............................................... 127Driving tips ........................................ 130Driving systems ................................ 134

111

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew brake pads/linings only reach theiroptimum braking effect after several hundredkilometers of driving. Until that time, youmayneed to use increased brake pedal pressurewhile braking. This also applies after thebrake discs or the brake pads/linings havebeen replaced.

The first 1,000miles (1,500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varyingvehicle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RFor the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), do notdrive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at fullthrottle, during this period. Do not exceedÔ of themaximumpermitted engine speedfor each gear.RSelect the manual drive programM in goodtime.RDo not carry out a RACE START.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).ROnly select the shift range limits 3, 2 or 1when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainousterrain.

After 1,000 miles (1,500km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle up to full speed.

i You should also observe these breaking-in notes if your vehicle's engine ortransmission has been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it has

112 DrivingDrivingandparking

reached operating temperature. Theoperating temperature has been reachedwhen the engine oil temperature display inthe on-board computer's AMG menu nolonger flashes.Only shift into reverse gear when thevehicle is stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! During a cold start with low engine oiltemperatures (below 32 ‡) (0 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engineoperation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

Key positions

KEYLESS-GO start functionYou can switch the engine on and off with theStart/Stop button. For this, the SmartKeymust be inside the vehicle. The Start/Stopbutton is located in the center console and isilluminated when the vehicle is unlocked.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.If there is a SmartKey in the ignition lock, thistakes precedence over the KEYLESS-GO startfunction.

X Position 0: if Start/Stop button: has notyet been pressed, this corresponds to theSmartKey being removed from the ignition.

X Position 1: press Start/Stop button:.You can now activate the windshieldwipers, for example.

If you press Start/Stop button: twice whenin this position and the driver's door is open,the power supply is deactivated again.X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stopbutton: twice.

The power supply is switched off again if:Ryou press Start/Stop button: once whenin this positionRthe driver's door is open

SmartKeyYou can also start the vehicle with theSmartKey in the ignition lock.The ignition lock is located in the rearstowage space of the center console.

Driving 113

Drivingandparking

Z

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

i Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stopbuttoni The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. You merelyneed to carry the SmartKey on your person.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 113)once.The engine starts.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyIf the Start/Stop button is inoperative, youcan also start the vehicle using the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in theignition lock (Y page 113) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Pulling away

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position, if:Rthe engine is running andRyou depress the brake pedalOnly then is the parking lock released. If thebrake pedal is not depressed, the E-SELECT

114 DrivingDrivingandparking

lever can still bemoved but the parking lockremains engaged.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Use the E-SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to position D or R.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake is automaticallyreleased (Y page 129).i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down. The automatic door lock canalso be deactivated (Roadster only).

Hill start assist

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist will aid you when pulling awayon a hill. It holds the vehicle for a short timeafter you have removed your foot from thebrake pedal. This gives you enough time tomove your foot from the brake pedal to theaccelerator pedal and depress it before thevehicle begins to roll.X Take your foot off the brake pedal.i Once you have taken your foot off thebrake pedal, the vehicle is held for aroundone second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist does not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or ona downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.

Rthe vehicle is secured with the electricparking brake.RESP® is malfunctioning.

Driving 115

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again. Alternatively, press theStart/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 114). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 240).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

116 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The coolanttemperature gaugeshows a value above248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolantto cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 216). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fanmay be faulty.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive on to thenearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and start/stop traffic.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Observe the "Important safety notes" sectionon activating/deactivating ESP®(Y page 56).

E-SELECT selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

! If the engine speed is too high or if thevehicle is rolling, do not shift thetransmission directly from D to R, from Rto D or directly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds intransmission position D or R, park positionP is otherwise engaged automatically.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 117

Drivingandparking

Z

The transmission could be damaged.

i The E-SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position.The current transmission position P, R, Nor D appears in the transmission positiondisplay in the multifunction display.

If you wish to select a transmission positionor to disengage park position P, the enginemust be running.

Engaging park position PX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Press the P button in the center console.

i Park position P is disengaged if you:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the E-SELECT lever forwards orback to the first point of resistance

The transmission shifts to neutral N.To shift directly from P to R:X Depress the brake pedal and push theE-SELECT lever forwards past the firstpoint of resistance.

To shift directly from P to D:X Depress the brake pedal and push theE-SELECT lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position is engaged automatically in thefollowing circumstances:Rif you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's or front-passenger door.Rif you remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.Rif you open the door while traveling at lowspeed in transmission position D or R.

Shifting to neutral NX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever forwards or backto the first point of resistance.

i If you use the E-SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching off theengine, the transmission remains forapproximately 30 minutes inN. If you openthe driver's or front-passenger door duringthis period, the transmission automaticallyshifts to P.The transmission remains in N if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock andRyou use the E-SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching theengine off

This still applies if you open the driver's orfront-passenger door.Further information is available in the "Carwash" section (Y page 219).

Engaging reverse gear RX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever forward past thefirst point of resistance.

Shifting to transmission position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.

118 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission position and driveprogram display

Display in transmission positions P, Rand N

: Transmission position: currently selectedtransmission position is displayed ininverted colors

; Drive program (C/S/S+/M)In addition to drive program; being shownin the multifunction display, the currentlyselected drive program is indicated in red onthe drive program selector switch.

Display when in transmission positionD

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive program (C/S/S+)If you have restricted the shift range, thetransmission position and the selected shiftrange, e.g. D3, are shown at position:.

Display when in transmission positionD and drive program M

: Gear; Drive program

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P unless the vehicle isstationary. The parking lock shouldnot be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake inaddition to the parking lock in orderto secure the vehicle.In the event of a malfunction of thevehicle's electronics, thetransmission may lock in positionP.Have the vehicle electronicschecked at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center,immediately.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 119

Drivingandparking

Z

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it.Do not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. The transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission topositionN if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

7 DriveThe transmission shifts into driveprograms (C/S/S+) automatically.All forward gears are available.

Changing gearThe transmission shifts into individual gearsautomatically. This is determined by:Rdrive position DRthe selected drive program (C/S/S+)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speedRa shift range restriction, if selectedThe shift points primarily depend on:Rthe position of the accelerator pedal:little throttle: early upshifts; high throttle:late upshiftsRthe driving dynamicsA dynamic driving style with highlongitudinal and lateral acceleration delaysthe shift points to higher engine speeds.

Driving tips

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutchfunction is active regardless of the currentlyselected drive program. The double-clutch

function reduces the load change reaction onthe drive axle. The sound generated by thedouble-clutch function and its characteristicsdepend on the drive program selected.

Kickdowni Kickdown is not available in manual driveprogram M.

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.Depending on the selected drive program,the transmission shifts to the lowest gearallowing ideal acceleration.

Drive program selectorWith the drive program selector switch, youcan choose from a range of differenttransmission configurations or select theRACE START drive mode.

Driveprogram

Characteristic

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfort-oriented,optimum-economy engineand transmission settings

S Sport Sporty engine andtransmission settings

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty engineand transmission settings

M Manual Manual gear shifting

120 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Driveprogram

Characteristic

Driving mode

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicleacceleration from astandstill

X Turn drive program selector switch: untilthe desired drive program is shown in themultifunction display.

i RS cannot be selected during normaldriving. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 121).

Steering wheel paddle shiftersIn transmission position D, you can use thesteering wheel paddle shifters to restrict orderestrict the transmission shift range. Oneof the automatic drive programs, C, S or S+,must be selected in order to do so.In manual drive program M, you need tochange gear yourself using the steeringwheelpaddle shifters. At low engine speeds, thetransmission shifts down automatically.

i GT model: in manual drive program M,the transmission shift and response timesare significantly shorter with sportier andmore aggressive gear changes.

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter(DOWN): shift down/restrict shift range

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (UP):shift up/derestrict shift range

RACE STARTRACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start under suitable high-griproad surface conditions.RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closedRthe engine is running and the engine andtransmission are at operating temperature(Y page 157)RSPORT handling mode is switched on(Y page 56)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadpositionRthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot)Rthe transmission is set to D

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector switchclockwise (Y page 120) until the RSindicator on the switch lights up in red.The multifunction display shows themessage RACE STARTConfirm: PaddleRACE STARTConfirm: PaddleUPCancel: Paddle DOWNUPCancel: Paddle DOWN.i If the conditions for activation are notfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START Not PossibleRACE START Not Possible messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (DOWN) (Y page 121).The multifunction display shows the RACERACESTART CanceledSTART Canceled message.

X To confirm: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (UP) (Y page 121).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in themultifunction display.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 121

Drivingandparking

Z

i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within a few seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin a few seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal whilekeeping the accelerator pedal fullydepressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximumacceleration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.Drive program S+ is activated. SPORThandling mode remains switched on.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activationconditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACESTART Not PossibleSTART Not Possible or RACE STARTRACE STARTCanceledCanceled message appears in themultifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly withina short period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

Automatic drive programDrive program C is characterized by thefollowing:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe transmission shifting up sooner

Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe transmission shifting up sooner; Thisresults in the vehicle being driven at lowerengine speeds and the wheels being lesslikely to spin

Drive programs S and S+ are characterizedby the following:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe transmission shifting up later andshifting down dynamicallyRas a result of the later transmissionupshifts, the fuel consumption may behigherRif a period of dynamic driving is followed byan extended phase with a constantaccelerator pedal position, the vehicleshifts up to a higher gear. This optimizesfuel consumption

If a gentle driving style is adopted inautomatic drive programs C/S/S+, the driveprogram settings are adjusted to optimizefuel consumption. Depending on theoperating conditions, the transmission shiftsto a higher gear.

Shift ranges

IntroductionIn certain driving situations, it isrecommended that you restrict the shiftrange. The set shift range appears in theinstrument cluster's multifunction display(Y page 119). The transmission only shifts tothe gear displayed in the instrument cluster.When the maximum engine speed is reached,the transmission shifts up a gear in theautomatic programs C/S/S+. Gearrestriction is correspondingly increased byone gear.

122 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Driving situation

= The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized in this position

5 You can use the braking effect ofthe engine on downhill gradientsand for driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Derestricting the shift range/shiftingupX Pull the right steering wheel paddle (UP).The shift range is derestricted. If you aredriving in manual drive program M, thetransmission shifts up to the next gear.

Restricting the shift range/shiftingdownX Pull the left steering wheel paddle (DOWN).The transmission shifts down one gear andrestricts the shift range to this gear.If the engine speed in manual driveprogram M is too high, it is not possible toshift down. If you pull the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (DOWN)(Y page 124), the two red segments in theinstrument cluster flash.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (UP) until the number for the geardisappears from the multifunction display.

orX Use the E-SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to position D.The transmission shifts from the currentshift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter repeatedly until the function isactivated.Depending on the selected drive program,the transmission shifts to a gear whichallows ideal acceleration and deceleration.To do this, the transmission shifts downone or more gears.

Manual drive programi GT model: in manual drive program M,the transmission shift and response timesare significantly shorter with sportier andmore aggressive gear changes.

In manual drive program M, you need tochange gear yourself using the steeringwheelpaddle shifters (Y page 121). Thetransmission only shifts down automaticallyat low engine speeds depending on therespective gear.

! In manual drive program M, thetransmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer and observethe upshift indicator. There is otherwise arisk of engine damage.

X To activate the manual drive program:turn the drive program selector switch untilM appears in the instrument cluster'smultifunction display.M lights up in red on the drive programselector switch.

X To deactivate the manual driveprogram: turn the drive program selectorswitch and select another drive program.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 123

Drivingandparking

Z

Upshift indicatorThe upshift indicator is a four-stage displaydesigned to assist you in sporty driving.

The upshift indicator allows you to recognizethe ideal shift point for dynamic acceleration.White segments: and yellow segment;light up in succession from left to right.When red segments= light up and the "up"message appears in the multifunctiondisplay, the ideal shift point has beenreached:X Shift up using the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (UP) as quickly as possible.The vehicle shifts up to the next gear.

i If you continue to increase the enginespeed without shifting up in time, the fuelsupply is shut off to protect the engine. Thisresults in abruptly reduced acceleration.

Display for downshift overrideIf the engine speed is too high, you cannotshift down with the left steering wheel paddleshifter. If you then pull the left steering wheelpaddle shifter, both red segments= light upbriefly.

AMG button (SETUP)

With the AMG button, you can call up andstore a default drive program setting and thedefault suspension tuning.

X To store: press and hold AMG button:until you hear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button:.The stored drive program is selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button:.The multifunction display shows the SETUPin the AMG menu (Y page 157).

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly with

124 RefuelingDrivingandparking

clean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Touch the vehicle body immediately beforeopening the fuel filler cap. Any existingelectrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. The repaircosts are high. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.Further information on fuel and on fuel gradescan be found in the "Fuel" section(Y page 277).

Refueling

Fuel filler flapWhen you open or close the vehicle with theSmartKey, the fuel filler flap is automaticallyunlocked or locked.The fuel filler flap is located to the rear on theright. The position of the fuel filler cap isdisplayed in the instrument cluster8. Thearrow next to the filling pump indicates theside of the vehicle.

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler cap

OpeningX Switch off the engine.

i When the engine is running and the fuelfiller flap is open, the engine diagnosticswarning lamp; may light up.Further information can be found in the"Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster" chapter (Y page 191).

X Open the driver's door. This switches theignition to position0, which corresponds tohaving removed the SmartKey. The driver’sdoor can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

Refueling 125

Drivingandparking

Z

X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap?.

X Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle intothe filler neck and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

ClosingX Replace the fuel filler cap and turn itclockwise. The fuel filler cap audiblyengages.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

126 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G Risk of explosion or fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.X Set the Start/Stop button to key position 0 immediately.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 67).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 69).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf flammable materials such as leaves, grassor twigs are exposed to prolonged contact toparts of the exhaust system that heat up, theycould ignite. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.

They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! If the engine speed is too high or if thevehicle is rolling, do not shift thetransmission directly from D to R, from Rto D or directly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds intransmission position D or R, park positionP is otherwise engaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

Parking 127

Drivingandparking

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P.Rthe SmartKey must be in position 0 in theignition lock and then removed from theignition lock, or the Start/Stop buttonmustbe pressed.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turnthe front wheels towards the curb.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, thefront axle of an empty vehicle must besecured, for example with a wheel chock.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, therear axle of a laden vehicle must beadditionally secured, for example with awheel chock.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the engine is switched off, thetransmission shifts into neutral position N.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk ofan accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

! Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds intransmission position D or R, park positionP is otherwise engaged automatically. Thiscan damage the transmission.

i Observe the display messages in theinstrument cluster.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmissionX Shift the transmission to P with the buttonin the center console.

Using the Start/Stop buttonX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 113).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Apply the electric parking brake.

i If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, thetransmission automatically shifts to N.If you move the E-SELECT lever toN beforeswitching off the engine, the transmissionremains for approximately 30 minutesin N.If you open the driver's or front-passengerdoor during this period, the transmissionautomatically shifts to P.i The engine can be turned off while thevehicle is in motion by pressing and holdingthe Start/Stop button for about threeseconds.

Using the SmartKey! Do not remove the SmartKey while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds, parkposition P will otherwise be engagedautomatically.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds,transmission position P is engagedautomatically.This can damage the transmission.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The parking lock is activated.

X Apply the electric parking brake.

i If you move the E-SELECT lever to Nbefore switching off the engine, thetransmission remains for approximately30 minutes in N. If you open the driver's orfront-passenger door during this period,the transmission automatically shifts to P.

128 ParkingDrivingandparking

The transmission remains in N if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock andRyou use the E-SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching theengine off

This still applies if you open the driver's orfront-passenger door.Further information on transmissionpositionNwhen operating with a SmartKeyis available in the "Car wash" section(Y page 219).

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Applying/releasing manuallyX To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake isengaged, the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup in the instrument cluster.i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is in position0.

X Pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.i The electric parking brake can only thenbe released when the ignition is switchedon using the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the electric parking brakeautomaticallyThe electric parking brake is releasedautomatically when the following conditionsare simultaneously fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe hood is closed.Ryour seat belt is fastened.Ryou accelerate.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.For the parking brake to be releasedautomatically if your seat belt is not fastened,the following conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of P or you havepreviously driven faster than 2 mph(3 km/h).

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.

Parking 129

Drivingandparking

Z

X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 129).

i The vehicle is braked as long as you keepthe handle of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone sounds.Rthe Release Parking BrakeRelease Parking Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster appears.

When the vehicle has been braked to astandstill, the electric parking brake isengaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked up for longerthan six weeks, the vehicle may sufferdamage as a result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGPlease do not forget that your primaryresponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver'sattention to the road must always be his/herprimary focus when driving. For your safetyand the safety of others, we recommend thatyou pull over to a safe location and stopbefore placing or taking a telephone call.If you choose to use the telephone5 whiledriving, please use the hands-free device andonly use the telephone when road, weatherand traffic conditions permit. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile telephone while driving a vehicle.Only operate the COMAND5 (CockpitManagement and Data System) if road,weather and traffic conditions permit.Otherwise, you may not be able to observetraffic conditions and could endanger yourselfand others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried outaccording to the service intervals listed inthe Maintenance Booklet or the serviceinterval display.

5 Observe all legal requirements.

130 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increasedwhen you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Driving tips 131

Drivingandparking

Z

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakeswhen braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed or driven throughdeep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignitionmust be switched off (the SmartKey mustbe in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock orthe Start/Stop button must be in position0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested usinga brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised.Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Have this workcarried out at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Have the brake pads replaced and the brakefluid renewed at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals. To do so, press firmly on the brakepedal when driving at a high speed. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 55).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

132 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

AMG high-performance compositebrake systemThe AMG high-performance compound brakesystem and the AMG ceramic high-performance compound brake system aredesigned for high loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such astemperature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individualdriving style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain furtherinformation about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, andadapt your driving and braking accordinglyduring this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results incorrespondingly high brake wear. Observethe brake wear warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and note any brake statusmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Winter driving

Points to remember

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

Driving tips 133

Drivingandparking

Z

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

At the onset of winter, have your vehiclewinterized at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 250).

Summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 250).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the road

surface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 250).

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select shift range1, 2 or 3 in good time (Y page 122). By doingso, you will make use of the braking effect ofthe engine, This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in lane.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canset any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheels

134 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

to lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate cruise control? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the lower section of themultifunction display.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; to the pressure point.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. The

stored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever to thepressure point, up: for a higher speed ordown; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts the

Driving systems 135

Drivingandparking

Z

vehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Making adjustments in 1 mphincrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever to thepressure point, up: for a higher speed ordown; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Making adjustments in 10 mphincrementsX Briefly press the cruise control leverbeyond the pressure point, up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou press the electric parking brakehandle.Ryou are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Ryou shift the transmission to N while thevehicle is in motion.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. The "Cruise control offCruise control off"message is displayed in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport +or Comfort

If you select Comfort or Sport + mode andrestart the engine, the mode reverts to Sport.

i GTmodel: you can only choose betweenSport and Sport + modes. If you selectSport + mode and restart the engine, themode reverts to Sport.

Sport modeThe firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button: once.Indicator lamp? lights up. You haveselected Sport mode.The AMG Ride Control SPORTAMG Ride Control SPORT messageappears in the multifunction display.

i GT model: Sport mode is the standardsetting. Indicator lamp? cannot beswitched off.

136 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension tuningin Sport + mode ensures the best possiblecontact with the road. Select this mode onlywhen driving on race circuits.If indicator lamps= and? are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps= and? light up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMGAMG RideRide ControlControl SPORT +SPORT +messageappears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp? lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp= lights up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMGAMG RideRide ControlControl SPORT +SPORT +messageappears in the multifunction display.

Comfort modei GT model: Comfort mode is unavailable.In comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. Selectthis mode if you favor a more comfortabledriving style, but also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. freeways.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps= and? go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Ride Control COMFORTAMG Ride Control COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Storing and calling up settingsOnce the suspension tuning and driveprogram have been selected, you can storeand call up your settings using AMGbutton;.X To store: press AMG button; until youhear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button;.The stored suspension tuning and driveprogram are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button;.Your selection appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRrelease the electric parking brake

Driving systems 137

Drivingandparking

Z

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using four sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps.

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 224).

Example: side view (Coupe)

Example: top view (Coupe)

Front sensors

Center approx. 40in (approx.100cm)

Corners approx. 24in (approx.60cm)

Rear sensors

Center approx. 48in (approx.120cm)

Corners approx. 32in (approx.80cm)

Minimum distance

Center approx. 12in (approx.30cm)

Corners approx. 12in (approx.30cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is in therear compartment on the parcel shelf.

138 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Warning display for the front area: Left-hand side of the vehicle; Right-hand side of the vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness= light up.The selector lever position determines whichwarning display is active while the engine isrunning:

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R or N Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you switch on the ignition and releasethe parking brake.

Driving systems 139

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20 seconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately 20seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 224).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright light

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. Inthis event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

General notesRear view camera: is an optical parking aid.It shows the area behind your vehicle in theCOMAND display.

140 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

View through the cameraThe area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

The rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

Activating the rear view cameraX Make sure that key position 2 has beenselected with the Start/Stop button.

X Make sure that the "rear view camera"function is selected in COMAND (see the

separate operating instructions forCOMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The COMAND display shows the areabehind the vehicle.

You can also switch off the display of the areabehind the vehicle in the COMAND display.

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from speeds ofapproximately 20 mph(30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. For this purpose, Blind SpotAssist uses sensors in the rear bumper.Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with aspeed difference of more than 6.8 mph(11 km/h)

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void any

Driving systems 141

Drivingandparking

Z

warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensors.Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snow.Ra narrow vehicle, e.g. a motorbike orbicycle, is traveling in front.Rthe road has very wide lanes.Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou are not driving in themiddle of the lane.Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders.Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Example (Roadster)

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are not

driving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if the vehicles are driving on theinner side of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Theradar sensors must not be covered, e.g. byoverhanging loads. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers,have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow up to a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20mph(30 km/h) the indicatorlamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds aboveapproximately 20 mph(30 km/h), warninglamp: on the corresponding side lights upred. This warning is always given when a

142 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

vehicle enters the blind spot monitoringrange from behind or from the side. When youovertake a vehicle, the warning only occurs ifthe difference in speed is less than7 mph(12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 153) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Ensure that key position 2 has beenselected with the Start/Stop button.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Driving systems 143

Drivingandparking

Z

144

Useful information ............................ 146Important safety notes .................... 146Displays and operation .................... 146

145

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Important safety notes

You will find an illustration of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section(Y page 27).

G WARNINGA driver's attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by thedriver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

G WARNINGNo messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lamps

Rmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systemsDriving characteristics may be impaired.If youmust continue to drive, do sowith addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGMalfunction and warning messages are onlyindicated for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to theoperation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner's and/or driver'sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle'soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance and safety checks performed onthe vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to address themalfunction and warning messages.

Displays and operation

Engine oil temperature displayThe engine oil temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side.Under normal operating conditions, thetemperature may rise to 140 †.The transmission fluid temperature and thecoolant temperature are displayed in theAMG menu (Y page 157).

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

146 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Outside temperature display

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 147).Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Operating the on-board computerThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

: Multifunction display

; 6~ Makes/accepts orrejects/ends a callWX Increases/reducesvolume

= ? Switches on the Voice ControlSystem; see the separate operatinginstructions

? %Press briefly:back, deactivates the Voice ControlSystem and fades out displaymessages%Press and hold:selects the standard display

A =; Selects the menu bar andselects menus

9:Press briefly:selects a submenu or scrolls throughlistsIn the AudioAudio menu, selects a storedstation, an audio track or a videosceneIn the TelTel menu (telephone),switches to the telephone book andselects a name or a telephonenumber

9:Press and hold:In the AudioAudio menu, selects theprevious/next station, selects anaudio track or a video scene usingrapid scrollIn the TelTel menu (telephone), startstelephone book rapid scroll

a Confirms selection and hidesdisplay messagesIn the TelTel menu (telephone),switches to the phone book andstarts dialing

Multifunction displayValues and settings as well as displaymessages are shown in the multifunctiondisplay.

Displays and operation 147

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

: Selector lever position/shift range anddrive program

; Description field= Menu bar? Status line with time and outside

temperatureX To display menu bar==: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on thesteering wheel to call up the menu bar andselect a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 147).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 148)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 149)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 151)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 152)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 141)RServiceService menu (Y page 153)RSettingsSettings menu (Y page 153)RAMG menuAMG menu (Y page 157)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumption

The From StartFrom Start trip computer isautomatically reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

148 Displays and operationOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

Calling up the rangeX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select approximaterange:.

Approximate range: is calculatedaccording to current driving style and theamount of fuel in the tank. If there is only asmall amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, thedisplay shows a vehicle being refueledCinstead of range:.

Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

: Digital speedometer

Resetting valuesYou can reset the values of the followingfunctions:Rtrip odometerRtrip computer "From start"Rtrip computer "From reset"

X Press the= or; button to select theTripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa.

Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example)X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can findfurther information in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance inactive

Example: direction of travel display: Direction of travel; Current road

Displays and operation 149

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Route guidance activeNo change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? Symbol for "follow the road's course"

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Symbol for change of direction

When a change of direction has beenannounced, you will see visual distancedisplay; next to the symbol for change ofdirection=. This decreases in size as youapproach the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendationLane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? Symbol for change of direction

On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation= may be shown for the next change ofdirection. Lanes may be added during achange of direction.

Lane recommendation display (example): Uninterrupted lane; New lane during a change of direction= Lane recommended for the change of

directionYou can find further information on lanerecommendation in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Other status indicators of the navigationsystemRO: you have reached the destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route: anew route is being calculated.ROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

150 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

You can find further information on statusindicators in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio stationYou can only change the waveband and storenew stations using COMAND.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

: Waveband; Station6

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the stationlist: press and hold the9 or:button.

X To select a station using manualtuning (only when a station list is notreceived): press and hold9 or:.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.You can find further information onoperating the satellite radio in the separateoperating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audio mediaAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

CD player display (example): Current trackX To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until the desired trackhas been reached.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and name of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operationX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until the desiredscene has been reached.

6 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.

Displays and operation 151

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Telephone menu

IntroductionG WARNINGA driver's attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephonewhile driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenweather, road and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

Functions and displays are dependent on theoptional equipment installed in your vehicle.You can establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).X Switch on the mobile phone and COMAND.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:REnter PINEnter PIN: the mobile phone has beenplaced in themobile phone bracket and thePIN has not been entered.

X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone,Voice Control System or COMAND.Themobile phone will search for a network.In the meantime, the Phone No ServicePhone No Servicedisplay message appears in themultifunction display.RPhone ReadyPhone Ready or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in theTelTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display, for example:

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

You can accept a call even if you are not inthe TelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookIf your mobile phone is able to receive calls,you can search for and dial a number from thephone book in COMAND at any time.X Copy the phone book from the mobilephone to COMAND.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button to callup the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.To scroll rapidly, press and hold the9or the: button for longer than onesecond. After a short time, the rapid scrollspeeds up.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

152 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

Assistance menu

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistYou can use the BlindBlind SpotSpot Asst.Asst. functionto activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist(Y page 141).X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Pressa.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: pressaagain.

Maintenance menu

In the Serv.Serv. menu, you can:Rcall up display messages (Y page 160)Rcheck the tire pressure electronically(Y page 255)Rcall up the service due date (Y page 218)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettings menu you can:Rchange the instrument cluster settings(Y page 153)Rchange the light settings (Y page 154)Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 156)Rchange the convenience settings(Y page 156)Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 156)

Instrument clusterSelecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in km/h ormph in themultifunction display.The selected units apply to:Rthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menu

Displays and operation 153

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Rthe digital speedometer in the AMGAMG menuRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theINST. CLUSTERINST. CLUSTER submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Permanent display for outsidetemperature or additional speedometerThe Permanent display: OutsidePermanent display: OutsideTemperature/SpeedometerTemperature/Speedometer allows you tochoose whether the multifunction displayshows the outside temperature or the speedat the bottom right. The unit used in theadditional speedometer depends on thedisplay unit set (Y page 153).X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theINST. CLUSTERINST. CLUSTER submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent displayPermanent display function.You will see the selected setting [km/h][km/h] orDig. speedom [mph]Dig. speedom [mph] or outsideoutsidetemperaturetemperature.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

LightsSwitching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.

If you have activated the DaytimeDaytime RunningRunningLightsLights function and the light switch is in theà orc position, the daytime runninglamps are switched on automatically whenthe engine is running. If it is dark, the low-beam headlamps switch on automatically.In the dark, the following also light up:Rthe low-beam headlampsRthe standing lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampRthe side marker lampsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLIGHTSLIGHTS submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Setting the brightness for the display andswitchesYou can use the Brightness display/Brightness display/switchesswitches function to set the brightness ofthe multifunction display and the switches inthe vehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches:Brightness Display/Switches:function.You see the selected setting LevelLevel with avalue of between 0 and 100.

154 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to increaseor decrease the brightness.

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offThe Locator lightingLocator lighting function allows youto set whether the exterior lighting shouldcome on when it is dark:Rfor 40 seconds after unlocking the vehiclewith the SmartKeyThe exterior lighting switches off if youopen the driver’s door.Rfor 15 seconds after switching off theengine and closing the doorsIf the engine is switched off and then noneof the doors are opened, or if an open dooris not closed, the exterior lighting goes outafter 60 seconds.

If you activate the Locator LightingLocator Lightingfunction, the following light up:Rthe parking lampsRthe low-beam headlampsRthe license plate lampRthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrorsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLocator LightingLocator Lighting function.You will see the selected setting: onon oroffoff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating the delayed switch-offtemporarily:X Select key position 0 with the Start/Stopbutton before leaving the vehicle.

X Select key position 2 and then key position0 again with the Start/Stop buttonThe delayed switch-off is deactivated.

Delayed switch-off is reactivated the nexttime you start the engine.

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you select key position 0 with the Start/Stop button when the Light. DelayLight. Delayfunction is activated, the interior lightinglights up for approximately 20 seconds if it isdark.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior lighting delay sw. offInterior lighting delay sw. offfunction.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

VehicleActivating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you select the Automatic Door Lock:Automatic Door Lock:function, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph(15 km/h).

i For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 69).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.

Displays and operation 155

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic door locksAutomatic door locks function.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalYou can use the Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function todetermine whether there is an acousticconfirmation when locking and unlocking thevehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVEHICLEVEHICLE submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.You will see the selected setting:ActivatedActivated or DeactivatedDeactivated.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

ConvenienceActivating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment lever or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

You can use the EasyEasy Entry/Exit:Entry/Exit: functionto activate or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 86).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.You will see the selected setting:ActivatedActivated or DeactivatedDeactivated.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Switching the fold-in mirrors whenlocking feature on/offIf you switch on the FoldFold MirrorsMirrors inin whenwhenLocking:Locking: function, the exterior mirrors foldin when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.If you have switched the function on and youfold the exterior mirrors in using the buttonon the door (Y page 88), they will not fold outautomatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theCONVENIENCECONVENIENCE submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theFold mirrors in when locking:Fold mirrors in when locking:function.You will see the selected setting: onon oroffoff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settingsFor safety reasons, the Day LightsDay Lights functionin the LightsLights submenu is only reset if thevehicle is stationary.

156 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingsFactory Settings submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectYesYes or NoNo.

X Press thea button to confirm theselection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

AMG menu

AMG displaysX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

: Digital speedometer; Engine oil temperature= Coolant temperature? Transmission fluid temperature

If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †or if the transmission fluid temperature isbelow 60 †, the corresponding temperaturegauge flashes. Avoid driving at full engineoutput during this time.

SETUPSETUP displays the drive program, the AMGadaptive sport suspension system settingand the selected traction assist.

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

orX Press the AMG button on the centerconsole.

: Drive program (C/S/S+/M); ESP®mode (ONON/SportSport HandlingHandling ModeMode/

OFFOFF)= AMG adaptive sport suspension system

setting (COMFORTCOMFORT/SPORTSPORT/SPORT +SPORT +)RACETIMERDisplaying and starting RACETIMERG WARNINGThe RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roads isprohibited under all circumstances. The driveris and must always remain responsible forfollowing posted speed limits.

You can use the RACETIMER to store laptimes.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

i If the RACETIMER is selected, the=and; buttons are inoperative.

Displays and operation 157

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

: Digital speedometer; RACETIMER= Lap

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if key position 2 isselected with the Start/Stop button.X To start: start the RACETIMER witha.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lapIt is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps.X Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= Lap

Stopping the RACETIMERX Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Pressa to confirm YesYes.If you stop the vehicle and select key position1with the Start/Stop button, the RACETIMERinterrupts timing. If you select key position2 or 3 with the Start/Stop button and thenpressa to select STARTSTART, timing iscontinued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all lapsIf you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race TimerReset Race Timer appears in themultifunction display.

158 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statisticsThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

Lap statisticsThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol:.

: Lap; Lap time

= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapX Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Displays and operation 159

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

Hiding display messages

G WARNINGAll categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and,where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.X Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red.You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display showsthese messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messagesin themessage memory.X Press= or; on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Confirm witha.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

160 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Braking

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)ABS and ESCABS and ESCCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.For example, the on-board voltagemay be insufficient. In addition,theh, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrumentcluster.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard braking.This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and mayincrease the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to amalfunction, BAS and ESP® are also deactivated. There is anincreased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)ABS and ESCABS and ESCInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to amalfunction. In addition, theh, å and ! warning lampslight up in the instrument cluster.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard braking.This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and mayincrease the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to amalfunction, BAS and ESP® are also deactivated. There is anincreased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation 161

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)EBR, ABS, ESCEBR, ABS, ESCInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS and hillstart assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. In addition, theh, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrumentcluster and a warning tone sounds.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

G WARNINGIf EBD and ABS are malfunctioning, the rear wheels in particularcould lock under braking. If ABS is deactivated due to amalfunction, BAS and ESP® are also deactivated. There is anincreased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake.orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes, the warning lamp (yellow)lights up and a warning tone sounds.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning and the braking effectis restricted.While the vehicle is in motion:X Release the electric parking brake handle.

While the vehicle is stationary:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake.X After the emergency stop: release the electric parking brakelever.

162 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOper. ManualOper. Manual

! The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. Additionally theindicator lamp (red) lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Pull the electric parking brake handle.orX Pull away carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Pull the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds,until the display message disappears.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes.The power supply for the electric parking brake was interrupted.X Pull the electric parking brake handle.orX Pull away carefully.orX Pull the electric parking brake handle until the display messagedisappears.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and the warning lamp(yellow) lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.orX Pull away carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation 163

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

! Thewarning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicatorlamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parkingbrake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remainslit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because ofovervoltage or undervoltage.X Pull away carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If there is overvoltage or undervoltage:X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage or release theelectric parking brake.

If this does not release the electric parking brake:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! Thewarning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicatorlamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parkingbrake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remainslit.The electric parking brake has overheated.X Allow the vehicle to cool down. Do not engage or release theelectric parking brake during this time.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X When the vehicle has cooled down: switch the ignition off andon again, then engage or release the electric parking brake.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking BrakeParking BrakeInoperativeInoperative

! Thewarning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicatorlamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parkingbrake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remainslit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage the electricparking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

164 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On theTurn On theIgnition toIgnition toRelease theRelease theParking BrakeParking Brake

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while theignition was switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Inaddition, theJ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGDriving with the message Check Brake Fluid LevelCheck Brake Fluid Level displayedcan result in an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGDriving with the message CheckCheck BrakeBrake FluidFluid LevelLevel displayed can result in an accident. Haveyour brake system checked immediately.Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can beseriously burned.

Displays and operation 165

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷ESC InoperativeESC InoperativeSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to amalfunction. In addition, theh and å warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING

If ESP® andBASare deactivated, the danger of skidding and havingan accident increases.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ESC CurrentlyESC CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Theself-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. Thebrake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. In addition, theh and å warninglamps light up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING

If ESP® andBASare deactivated, the danger of skidding and havingan accident increases.X Carefully drive a short distance making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12mph (20 km/h) until the displaymessage disappears.

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than thesystem's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseat.Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied.The system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

166 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and themultifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If theindicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has disabled the front-passenger air bag.Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least60 seconds until the necessary system checks have beencompleted. This is necessary to make sure that the displaymessages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp remains off even after performing the above corrective steps, donot have any children twelve years old and under and other small individuals use the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Displays and operation 167

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger kneebag are disabled during the journey even though a person largerthan a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat. Ifadditional forces are applied to the seat, the systemmay interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and themultifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If theindicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger airbag (Y page 42).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least60 seconds, until the necessary system checks have beencompleted. This is necessary and ensures that the displaymessages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp remains lit with an adult occupant on the front-passenger seateven after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

168 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

GTele AidTele AidInoperativeInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered in the event of anaccident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. In this condition,the restraint system provides only restricted protection.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Front Left SRSFront Left SRSMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService RequiredorFront Right SRSFront Right SRSMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered in the event of anaccident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. In this condition,the restraint system provides only restricted protection.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not beoperational.For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when neededin an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly andunnecessarily which could also result in injury.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:The display message will only appear if all or a number of LEDs have failed.

Displays and operation 169

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LowLow BeamBeamorCheck Right LowCheck Right LowBeamBeam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp does not light up. Inaddition, the high-beam headlamp is also inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAUTOAUTO LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.USA only:X Switch off the daytime running lamps in the on-board computer(Y page 154).

X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The LEDs in the rear left or right-hand indicator lamp do not lightup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

None of the LEDs in the left or right-hand exterior mirrors light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The LEDs in the front left or right-hand indicator lamp do not lightup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

None of the LEDs in the high-mounted brake lamp light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

170 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamporCheck Right BrakeCheck Right BrakeLampLamp

The left or right-hand brake light LEDs do not light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamporCheck Right TailCheck Right TailLampLamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp LEDs do not light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeamorCheck Right HighCheck Right HighBeamBeam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp does not light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LicenseLicensePlate LampPlate LamporCheck RightCheck RightLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp does not light up.X Replace the bulb (Y page 97).

bBackup LightBackup Light

None of the LEDs in the backup lamp light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning LightorCheck RightCheck RightDaytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight

The LEDs in the left or right-hand daytime running lamp do notlight up. As a result, the corresponding side/standing lamp hasfailed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation 171

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker LamporCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker LamporCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking LamporCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

G WARNINGDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burnif it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

172 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Low StopCoolant Low StopVehicle TurnVehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot. In addition, the? warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked, e.g.by snow, slush or ice.

X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting theengine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the coolant temperature increases again, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.

! If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do notcontinue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The poly-V-belt may have torn. A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: do not start the engineagain until the display message disappears. Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult aqualified specialist workshop.

? The engine fan is defective.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads (e.g. driving inmountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving.

Displays and operation 173

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely paying attention to roadand traffic conditions and switch off the engine.

X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 216).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! The coolant level is too low. Avoid making long journeys withtoo little coolant in the cooling system. The enginewill otherwisebe damaged.The display messages and the corresponding symbol thatindicate that the coolant level is too low must not be ignored.

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Levellow Stop Vehiclelow Stop VehicleTurn Engine OffTurn Engine Off

There is insufficient oil in the engine. There is a risk of enginedamage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Top up and check the engine oil level (Y page 215).

174 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add 1(Add 1 Liter)Liter)

The oil level is too low.X Check the oil level (Y page 215).X If necessary, add engine oil.X Have the engine checked for leaks if you need to add engine oilmore often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

! The oil level is too low. Avoid long journeyswith too little engineoil. There is a risk of engine damage.The display messages and the corresponding symbol thatindicate that the oil level is too low must not be ignored.

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelToo HighToo High

You have added too much engine oil. The engine or catalyticconverter may be damaged.X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level.Observe the legal requirements.

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelCannot Be MeasuredCannot Be Measured

The measuring system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Engine OilEngine OilPressure ControlPressure ControlSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The oil pressure sensor has reported a malfunction.The oil pressure control is in emergency mode.The engine lubrication is guaranteed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Engine OilEngine OilPressure StopPressure StopVehicle TurnVehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Check the engine oil level (Y page 215) and top up if necessary.X If there are visible signs of oil loss from the vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.

C There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Displays and operation 175

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¸Replace Air FilterReplace Air Filter

The air filter is dirty and must be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Check Fuel FilterCheck Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control--- mph--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You attempted to save a speed of less than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Activate ESP®(Y page 56).X If the situation allows, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andsave the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control(Y page 134).

176 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display messagedisappears if:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operatingtemperature range.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Clean the sensors (Y page 224).X Restart the engine.

Tires

G WARNINGTires with tire pressures that are too low or too high are associated with the following hazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is heavily laden or when driven at high speeds.Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly, which can severely impair tire traction.Rthe driving, steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired.There is a risk of accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including thespare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road drivingIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Displays and operation 177

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGInsufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Correct the tire pressure (Y page 255).X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 269).

TireTire Press.Press. WarningWarningCaution TireCaution TireMalfunctionMalfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGInsufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 269).

CorrectCorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,correct the tire pressure (Y page 255).

TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s)MissingSensor(s)Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

178 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

hTire Press.Tire Press.Warning CautionWarning CautionTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Awarning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGInsufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Repair the faulty tire or change the wheel (Y page 269).

hCheckCheck TireTire PressurePressure

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Awarning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGInsufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Correct the tire pressure (Y page 255).X If necessary, repair the faulty tire or change the wheel(Y page 269).

Displays and operation 179

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

L The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Close the hood.

´(Coupe only)

C(Roadsteronly)

At least one door is open.X Close the doors.

KConvertible TopConvertible TopOperationOperation PossiblePossibleto 31 mphto 31 mph

If you drive at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km/h), you cannotopen or close the soft top.X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 77).

KConvertible TopConvertible TopOpening/ClosingOpening/ClosingNot FinishedNot Finished

The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics aredepressurized.X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 77).

KOpen/CloseOpen/CloseConvertible TopConvertible TopCompletelyCompletely

The roof is not locked. If you drive at speeds of more than31 mph (50 km/h), you cannot open or close the soft top.X If you are driving at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km/h),reduce your speed.

X Push or pull the soft-top switch (Y page 77) until the soft top isfully open or closed.

KConvertibleConvertible TopTop ininOperation PleaseOperation PleaseWaitWait

The on-board voltage is too low.X Start the engine.

180 Displays and operationOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.The soft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safetyreasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 77).

KDepress BrakeDepress Brake

You have attempted to close the soft top with the soft top switchwhile the vehicle was stationary.X Depress the brake pedal.X Press the soft-top switch until the soft top is completely closed.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 217).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+ReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 64).

+Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds.When you switch off the engine, you will be unable to restart it.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Locate the SmartKey.

The SmartKey is not detected while driving because a powerfulradio transmitter is causing interference. A warning tone alsosounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position (Y page 113).

Displays and operation 181

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white displaymessage)

You are in the vehicle and the SmartKey currently cannot bedetected by the vehicle.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position (Y page 113).

+Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

+Key Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

+Close Doors toClose Doors toLock VehicleLock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

+Insert KeyInsert Key

The KEYLESS-GO start function is temporarily malfunctioning oris defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position (Y page 113).

+TakeTake YourYour KeyKey FromFromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Apply BrakeApply Braketo Shift from 'P'to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Apply BrakeApply Brakeand Start Engineand Start Engineto Disengage 'P'to Disengage 'P'

When the engine is switched off, it is not possible to shift out ofpark position P.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Start EngineStart Engineto Engage Gearto Engage Gear

The gear cannot be engaged when the engine is switched off.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

182 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Depress BrakeDepress Braketo Start Engineto Start Engine

You cannot start the engine. The engine was switched off inposition D or R.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Door OpenDoor OpenVehicle Not in 'P'Vehicle Not in 'P'

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, Nor D.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Press the electric parking brake handle.

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change gear due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Do not switch off the engine.X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 232).

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

If no transmission position and no drive program is displayed:X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 232).

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle iswhen Vehicle isStationaryStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.

ReversingReversing NotNot Poss.Poss.Service RequiredService Required

The sub geartrain with the even gears has failed. You can no longerengage reverse gear. The smoothness of the gear change isrestricted. The transmission is in emergency mode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation 183

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

jParking LockParking LockMalfunct. ApplyMalfunct. ApplyParking BrakeParking Brake

Transmission position P cannot be selected.X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 232).

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Have the vehicletransported on a recovery vehicle or towed with the rear axleraised (Y page 242).

dStop Engage PStop Engage P

The transmission is faulty. The vehicle loses drive and rolls to astandstill.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 232).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

dTransmission OilTransmission OilCoolingCoolingMalfunctionMalfunction

The transmission coolant pump is faulty. The transmission mayoverheat.X In the on-board computer, select the AMGAMG menu and check thetransmission oil temperature.

X Avoid excessive loading, e.g. due to dynamic driving.X If the transmission oil temperature is less than 248 ‡(120 †),you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop.

dTrans. OilTrans. OilOverheated DriveOverheated Driveon with Careon with Care

The transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive programM and shift range restriction are no longeravailable. Only drive program C is still available. The engine outputis reduced according to the degree of overheating.X Allow the transmission oil to cool by adopting a defensive drivingstyle.

184 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Rear spoiler

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÑRear SpoilerRear SpoilerControl SystemControl SystemInoperativeInoperative

The rear spoiler cannot be fully retracted and may extend again.If the retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:X Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.X Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.X Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÑRear SpoilerRear SpoilerInoperative LimitInoperative Limit200 km/h200 km/h

The rear spoiler cannot be fully extended and extends as far aspossible.The speed of the vehicle is limited to 125 mph(200 km/h).If the extension/retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. byice:X Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.X Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.X Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation 185

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Braking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USAonly)J(Canadaonly)

The red brakesystemwarning lampcomes onwhile theengine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGDriving with the red warning lamp displayed could lead to anaccident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 161).

Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

F(USAonly)!(Canadaonly)

The indicatorlamp for theelectricparking brakeflashes and/or the yellowwarning lampfor theelectricparking brakelights up.

The electric parking brake is temporarily malfunctioning ordefective.

G WARNINGIn this condition, the vehicle is only of limited roadworthiness. Thiscan lead to an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

G WARNINGDrivingwith the brakewarning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake systemchecked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checkingthe brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and thebrake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

186 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

7 After startingthe engine, thered seat beltwarning lamplights up for sixseconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).

7 After the enginestarts, a warningtone sounds forup to sixseconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

G WARNINGIf you do not wear the seat belt correctly, it no longer offers theintended level of protection in the event of an accident. Undercertain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatalinjuries in the event of an accident.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning tone ceases.

7 The red seat beltwarning lamplights up afterthe enginestarts, as soonas the driver'sdoor or thefront-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

G WARNINGIf you do not wear the seat belt correctly, it no longer offers theintended level of protection in the event of an accident. Undercertain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatalinjuries in the event of an accident.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.

G WARNINGIf you place objects on the front-passenger seat, the system couldidentify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident,the restraint systems on the front-passenger side are triggered.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

Displays and operation 187

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

7 The red seat beltwarning lampflashes and anintermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph(25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph(25 km/h).

G WARNINGIf you do not wear the seat belt correctly, it no longer offers theintended level of protection in the event of an accident. Undercertain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatalinjuries in the event of an accident.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warningceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph(25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph(25 km/h).

G WARNINGIf you place objects on the front-passenger seat, the system couldidentify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident,the restraint systems on the front-passenger side are triggered.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warningceases.

188 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

! The yellow ABSwarning lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, BAS andhill start assist are therefore also deactivated.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard braking.This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and mayincrease the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to amalfunction, then BAS, ESP® and hill start assist are alsodeactivated. There is an increased risk of skidding and anaccident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 166).

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

hå!

The yellow ESP®and ESP® OFFwarning lampsand the yellowABS warninglamp are lit whilethe engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other systems, e.g. BAS andhill start assist, are unavailable due to a malfunction. The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,for example.

G WARNING

If ABS and ESP® are defective, the wheels could lock whenbraking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking andmay increase the braking distance. If ABS and ESP® are defective,Brake Assist and hill start assist are deactivated. There is anincreased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 166).

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h The yellow ESP®warning lampflashes while thevehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Release the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 56).

M The yellowSPORT handlingmode warninglamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

SPORThandlingmode is activated. ESP® only stabilizes the vehiclein extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able toprovide enough assistance in such situations, and the vehicle maystart to skid.

G WARNINGThere is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 56).

hå

The yellow ESP®and ESP® OFFwarning lampsare lit while theengine isrunning.

ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilizethe vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without ESP®.

G WARNING

If ESP® is unavailable due to a malfunction, the danger of skiddingand having an accident increases.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 The red SRSwarning lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The air bags or ETDsmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of anaccident, not be triggered at all.

G WARNINGIf the air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices are eithertriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, are nottriggered, there is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

G WARNINGIn the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not beoperational.

190 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when neededin an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly andunnecessarily which could also result in injury.

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

; The yellowCheck Enginewarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must visit a qualified specialist workshopas soon as the yellow check engine warning lamp lights up. Thisis due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If indoubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the statein which you are currently driving.

; The yellowCheck Enginewarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning. Thesmoothness ofthe gear changeis restricted.

The sub geartrain with the odd gears has failed. The transmissionis in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

ç The red engineoil temperaturewarning lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

The engine oil temperature has exceeded 284 ‡(140 †).The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Allow the engine to cool down.

Displays and operation 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ç The red engineoil temperaturewarning lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning. Theengine oiltemperature isnot displayed.

The engine control unit data transfer is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

7 The yellowreserve fuelwarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

7 The yellowreserve fuelwarning lampflashes while theengine isrunning.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248‡(120†) do not continue driving. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

192 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGInsufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure(Y page 255).

X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 269).

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for60 seconds and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least every two weeks whencold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the tire pressure labelon the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires aresignificantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handlingand stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:

Displays and operation 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every timethe vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheelson your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

194 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Useful information ............................ 196Stowage areas .................................. 196Features ............................................. 198

195

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially whenbraking or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage compartments,parcel nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key, e.g. when leavingyour vehicle at a workshop.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

i Roadster: the glove box can be lockedand unlocked centrally using the SmartKey(Y page 62).

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,you will find an AUX IN jack or a MediaInterface installed in the glove box. AMediaInterface is a universal interface forportable audio equipment, e.g. for an

196 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

iPod® or USB device (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).

i There is a 12 V power socket located inthe glove box.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

X To open: press down at the middle of themarking on lid:.

X To close: fold down cover:.

i Depending on the equipment installed,your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray ora stowage compartment.

Stowage compartment under thearmrest

X To open: press button: on the left or rightand slide the armrest in the direction of thearrow.The armrest engages in two differentdetents.

i Roadster: the stowage compartment canbe locked and unlocked centrally using theSmartKey (Y page 62).

Stowage compartment in the rearcenter console

X Press button:.The stowage compartment opens.

i In the stowage compartment, you will findthe ignition lock (Y page 113) and the trunklid emergency release (Y page 73).

Stowage space on the rear wallbetween the seats

: Ruffled pocket

Parcel netsThere is a parcel net located in the front-passenger footwell.

Stowage areas 197

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIn order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,only use containers that fit into the cupholder. Use lids on open containers and donot fill containers to a height where thecontents, especially hot liquids, could spillduring braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupantsmay cause serious personal injury. Liquidsspilled on vehicle equipment may causedamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.An open cup holder may cause injury to youor others when contacted during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and bethrown around in the vehicle interior. Objectsthrown around in the vehicle interior maycause an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

Cup holder in the center console

Example: CoupeX Open the armrest (Y page 197).Cup holders: are under the armrest.

Sun visors

Overview of sun visors

G WARNINGDo not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while the vehicle is in motion.Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

Example: Coupe: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

Example: Coupe

198 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of bracket;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

Ashtrayi You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment forstowage.

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

Example: CoupeX To open: briefly press the middle ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: slide insert;forwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove insert;.X To re-install the insert: place insert;into the holder and press it in the oppositedirection of the arrow until it engages.

X To close: fold down cover:.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGNever touch the heating element or sides ofthe lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold theknob only.Make sure any children traveling with you donot injure themselves or start a fire with thehot cigarette lighter.

Features 199

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Example: CoupeX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To open: briefly press the middle ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

X To close: fold down cover:.

12 V sockets

Points to observe before useX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 113).

The sockets can be used for accessories withamaximum current draw of 180W (15 A), e.g.lamps or chargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i You can also use the sockets when theignition is switched off. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage doesnot drop too low. If the on-board voltage istoo low, the power to the sockets isautomatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the glove box

X Open the glove box (Y page 196).Lift up the cover of socket:.

Socket on the center console! If accessories are connected, make surethat a maximum current draw of 15 A is notexceeded. Otherwise, you will overload thefuse.

Example: CoupeX To open: briefly press the middle ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: fold down cover:.

200 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

mbrace7

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password willbe sent to you by mail. You can use thispassword to log onto the mbrace area under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com8.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone networkis available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if there is sufficientGPS reception and the vehicle position canbe forwarded to the Customer Center.

The mbrace systemThe mbrace system provides variousservices, e.g.:Rautomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press theW orX button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of COMAND.You can find further information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com9.

Self-diagnosis of the systemAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following conditionsoccurs:Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot light up during the system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringthe system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the ï informationbutton does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button, the

F Roadside Assistance button or theï information button continues to lightup red after the system self-diagnosis.Rthe TeleTele AidAid InoperativeInoperative or TeleTele AidAidNot ActivatedNot Activated message appears in themultifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.

7 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.8 USA only.9 USA only.

Features 201

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate asexpected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

An emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i An mbrace emergency call that has beeninitiated automatically cannot beterminated by the customer.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.

The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (asdetermined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the type of emergencyShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center and the vehicleoccupants. If the vehicle occupants respond,the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more information onthe emergency.

i If there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Response Centerestablished, then the mbrace system couldnot initiate an emergency call (e.g. therelevant cellular phone network is notavailable).The message Call FailedCall Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.

202 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency callmanually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

G WARNINGIf you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location), pleasedo not wait for voice contact after you havepressed the SOS button. Carefully leave thevehicle and move to a safe location. TheResponse Center will automatically contactlocal emergency officials with the vehicle'sapproximate location if they receive anautomatic SOS signal and cannot make voicecontact with the vehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press and hold Roadside Assistancebutton: for more than two seconds.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. TheConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. During the call, youcan change to the navigation menu bypressing the NAVI button on COMAND, forexample.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.X Describe the type of assistance needed.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or organizes for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorized

Features 203

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate aRoadside Assistance call if:Rthe indicator lamp in RoadsideAssistance button: is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The CallCall FailedFailedmessage appears on themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on COMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press and hold MB Info call button: formore than two seconds.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp inMB Info call button: flashes whilethe connection is being established. TheConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears in themultifunction display and COMAND ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. During the call, youcan change to the navigation menu bypressing the NAVI button on COMAND, forexample.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. You canobtain information on how to operate yourvehicle's systems, on the location of thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,and on further products and services offeredby Mercedes-Benz USA.Further details on the mbrace system can befound under http://www.mbusa.com10.Log in under "Owners Online".

i The mbrace system failed to initiate anMB Info call if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The CallCall FailedFailedmessage appears on themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on COMAND.

10 USA only.

204 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All othercalls can be ended by pressing the~button on the multifunction steering wheel orthe corresponding button for ending atelephone call on COMAND.

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, werecommend that you do this only when thevehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMANDi Information on the components andoperating principles of COMAND can befound in the separate COMAND operatinginstructions.

This service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can only use the DestinationDownload function if the vehicle isequipped with a navigation system.

Destination Download gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs)/important destinations thatcan be downloaded onto the navigationsystem of your vehicle. If you know thedestination, you can download the address orobtain the location of points of interest(POIs)/important destinations in thesurrounding area.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.

The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and datatransfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representativedetermines a suitable driving route based onyour current vehicle position and the desireddestination and guides you live through thecurrent sections of the route.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Vehicle remote closingIf you forget to lock your vehicle but are nolonger in the vicinity of the vehicle, it can belocked for you by the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be locked remotely up to fourdays after the ignition was last switched off.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at

Features 205

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your PIN.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the Tele AidTele AidDoors Locked RemotelyDoors Locked Remotely message appearsin the multifunction display.Alternatively, the vehicle can also be lockedvia the Internet or an iPhone in the "OwnersOnline" section using your ID number andpassword.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then attempts to locate the mbracesystem. The Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement agency if the vehicleis located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is active forlonger than 30 seconds, mbraceautomatically informs the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.

Rear spoilerThe rear spoiler improves the handling of thevehicle. It adapts the vehicle's aerodynamics

to the operating conditions, dependent on thespeed of the vehicle.

Example: Coupe

i If the vehicle is equipped with AMGadaptive sport suspension system, thebutton is in the switch strip above the airconditioning control panel.

Only use button: to extend and retract therear spoiler manually for cleaning.Button: is not used to operate the rearspoiler.If you drive at speeds above 75 mph(120 km/h), the rear spoiler extendsautomatically. Button: flashes until the rearspoiler has extended and then lights up in red.If you drive at speeds above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear spoiler remainsextended. Button: remains lit in red.If you drive at speeds below 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear spoiler retractsautomatically. Button: flashes until the rearspoiler has retracted and then goes out.

Extending and retracting the rearspoiler manuallyYou can extend and retract the rear spoilermanually for cleaning.

G WARNINGDuring manual retraction of the rear spoiler,make sure that nobody becomes trapped. Ifthere is a danger of someone becomingtrapped, release the rear spoiler button to

206 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

pause retraction. The rear spoiler is thenextended again.Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could unintentionally retract theextended rear spoiler. Someone could thenbecome trapped and seriously injured.

! Do not enter an automatic car wash withthe rear spoiler extended. Otherwise, therear spoiler may be damaged.Only extend the rear spoiler in order toclean it by hand. Retract it again when youhave finished cleaning it.

X Close the trunk lid.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To extend: press button:.The rear spoiler is extended.Button: flashes until the rear spoiler hasextended and then lights up in red.

X To retract: press and hold button: untilthe rear spoiler is completely retracted.Button: flashes until the rear spoiler hasretracted and then goes out.Rear Spoiler retracts manuallyRear Spoiler retracts manuallyappears in the display.

i If you release button: while retractingthe rear spoiler, it extends againautomatically.

Features 207

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Problems with the rear spoiler

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear spoiler stopsbefore reaching theend position whenretracting manually.

You have opened the trunk lid while manually retracting the rearspoiler.X Close the trunk lid.The rear spoiler extends or, if you press and hold button:,continues retracting.

The rear spoiler stopsbefore reaching theend position whenretracting/extendingmanually.

You have switched off the ignition.X Switch the ignition back on.X Press button: to extend/retract the rear spoiler.The rear spoiler extends/retracts.

The rear spoiler cannotbe retracted again aftermanually extending it.

You have opened the trunk lid while manually extending the rearspoiler.X Close the trunk lid.

The rear spoiler doesnot extend or retractautomatically.

The rear spoiler's movement is blocked, e.g. by an object jammedbetween the body and the rear spoiler.X Remove the object.

Garage door opener

Important safety notesThe HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100

G WARNINGBefore programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, the doormoves up or down. When programming a gateoperator, the gate opens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote control withany garage door opener that lacks safety stopand reverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling the doorto stop and reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.

208 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Do not run the engine while programming theintegrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),and inhaling it can cause unconsciousnessand possible death. All exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it cancause unconsciousness and possible death.

i Notes about the declaration of conformitycan be found here (Y page 21).

Programming the integrated garagedoor opener on the rear-view mirror

Programming buttonsG WARNINGOnly press the button on the integratedgarage door opener if there are no persons orobjects present within the sweep of thegarage door. Persons could otherwise beinjured as the door moves.

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clearthe integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 211).

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: startsflashing yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Features 209

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Synchronizing the rolling codeYour vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.Observe the safety notes when performingthe rolling code synchronization(Y page 208).X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press the programming button of the dooror gate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"Programming of additional remotecontrols").i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door starts to move.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat the

210 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

same programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls onlytransmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorOnce programmed, the integrated garagedoor openerA will assume the function ofthe garage door system's remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp: lightsup yellow. Press button;,= or? againif necessary.

Clearing the memory of the integratedgarage door opener on the rear-viewmirrorX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Charge maintenance socketThe battery may drain if the vehicle is leftstationary for long periods. In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends attaching thetrickle charger to the charge maintenancesocket.The charge maintenance socket is designedsolely for connecting a trickle charger. Atrickle charger can be obtained from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, forexample.

X Switch the ignition off.X Open the trunk lid.X Connect the cable provided in the trunk tothe trickle charger.

X Connect the trickle charger to chargemaintenance socket:. Consult themanufacturer's operating instructions onhow to do so.

i A trickle charger connected to chargemaintenance socket: only maintains thecurrent charge level of the vehicle'selectrical system battery. If the vehicle'selectrical system battery is discharged, itneeds to be chargedwith a battery charger.You will find further information oncharging the battery on (Y page 236).

Features 211

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGWhenever you are using a floormat,make surethere is enough clearance and that thefloormat is securely fastened.The floormat should always be securelyfastened using the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormat issecurely in place and adjust it if necessary. Aloose floormat could slip and hinder properfunctioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of eachother as this may impair pedal movement.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in position.X Press studs: onto retainers;.

X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers;.

X Remove the floormat.

212 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 214Engine compartment ........................ 214Maintenance ...................................... 217Care .................................................... 219

213

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it could tip forwardduring rapid deceleration of the vehicle andhit persons or objects within its path. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, always make sure that the hood isclosed and locked completely before drivingoff.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiator

and parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

Opening the hood

G WARNINGThe windshield wipers and wiper linkagecould be set in motion.When the hood is open, you or others couldbe injured by the wiper linkage.Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off. When using KEYLESS-GO, makesure that no ignition position is selected. Allindicator lamps in the instrument clustermustbe off.

214 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Hood release lever in driver's footwellX Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle; up and lift the hood.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil over adistance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oilconsumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

X Unscrew and remove oil filler cap: withthe integrated dipstick.

X Wipe the oil dipstick.X Screw on oil filler cap: again to the stop.

Engine compartment 215

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Unscrew oil filler cap: again and read thedipstick.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool downand thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

X Unscrew and remove oil filler cap: withthe integrated dipstick.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or under the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)of engine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck andtighten clockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 215).

You will find further information about engineoil in the "Technical data" section(Y page 279).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

216 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Set the Start/Stop button to key position2.

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe "AMG" menu (Y page 157).The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of the markerbar in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above the marker bar in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin coolant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

Youwill find further information about coolantin the "Technical data" section(Y page 280).

Windshield washer system andheadlamp cleaning system

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 281).

Maintenance

Service interval display

Service messagesInformation on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).

Maintenance 217

Maintenance

andcare

Z

You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The service interval message informs you ofthe next service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear a warning tone.The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:Next Service A in .. daysNext Service A in .. daysService A DueService A DueService A Exceeded by .. daysService A Exceeded by .. daysThe letter indicates which service is due. AAstands for a minor service and BB for a majorservice. A number or another letter may bedisplayed after the letter. This figure indicatesany necessary additional maintenance workto be performed.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The service interval display does not take intoaccount any periods of time during which thebattery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

i The service interval display does notprovide any information regarding theengine's oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 215).

Hiding a service messageX Press the% ora button on thesteering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm witha.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Points to remember

Resetting the service interval displayA qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe service interval display after thenecessary service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

! If the service interval display has beenreset unintentionally, have the settingcorrected at a Mercedes-Benz Center.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequentintermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for longperiods

218 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

Notes on careRegular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGMany cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle's doors or windows when cleaning theinside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice

scraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod right after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andbrake pads, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! When washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash, use the SmartKeyinstead of the Start/Stop button.Start the engine using the SmartKey.. Movethe transmission to N with the E-SELECTlever. Use the SmartKey to switch theengine off again and then turn theSmartKey to position 2. Make sure that you

Care 219

Maintenance

andcare

Z

then leave the SmartKey in position 2. Youmay otherwise damage the vehicle, thetransmission or the car wash.Check the transmission position in theinstrument cluster.

! Use the E-SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching theengine off. If you open the driver's or front-passenger door, the transmission remainsin this position for up to 30 minutes if theSmartKey is in the ignition, even if theengine is switched off. If you do not shiftthe transmission to N using the E-SELECTlever beforehand, it shifts automatically toparking position P and locks the wheels ifthe driver's or front-passenger door isopened and the engine is switched off. Thismay damage the vehicle, the transmissionor the car wash.

Observe the information on maneuvering(Y page 127).

! Before driving into an automatic car wash,make sure that it is suitable for thedimensions of the vehicle. In particular,make sure that:Rthere is enough ground clearancebetween the vehicle underbody and theguide rails of the automatic car wash.Rthe clearance width of the automatic carwash is sufficient, particularly the widthof the guide rails.Ryou enter the automatic car washstraight and in the center of the guiderails in order to avoid damaging the tiresor wheel rims.

Fold in the exterior mirrors before thevehicle is washed. The exterior mirrorscould otherwise be damaged.

! Make sure that:

Rthe side windows are fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed/theairflow control is set to position 0).Rthat the windshield wiper switch is inposition 0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In portal car washes, the windshieldwipers may be moved up the windshield bythe cleaning brushes when the ignition isswitched off.Set the Start/Stop button to key position2 to reset the windshield wipers to theiroriginal position.

! Preferably use automatic car washes withadjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. Thiscorresponds with the specification for theCabriolet program. In car washes that usehigh water pressures, there is a risk that asmall amount of water may leak into thevehicle.

! Cabriolet: do not treat the vehicle withhot wax under any circumstances.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax and drying agents from the windshieldand thewiper blades. Thiswill prevent smearsand reduce wiping noises caused by residueon the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in eachcountry.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

220 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Maintain a minimum distance of11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrim elementsRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod right after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andbrake pads, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Cleaning the paintworkScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.X Remove impurities immediately, wherepossible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-

Care 221

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or thepaint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas ofpaint damage quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish careIf your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due toincorrect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitablematerials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products such as gloss preserver(wax). These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).If wax comes into contact with the paintedsurface by accident, remove it immediatelywith commercially available petroleumether. Do so carefully and do not apply toomuch pressure to the painted surface.Ensure that no resinous, greasy or oilysubstances come into contact with the

paint, as these can leave a residue. If suchsubstances do come into contact with thepainted surface accidentally, remove theseimmediately with commercially availablepetroleum ether. Do so carefully and do notapply too much pressure to the paintedsurface.Tar stains or marks on the painted surfacecan be removed with a commerciallyavailable tar remover. Do so carefully anddo not apply too much pressure to thepainted surface.Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the Roadster soft topX Light soiling: you can clean the soft topwhile it is dry or rinse it with clear water.

X Normal to heavy soiling: clean the softtop with a brush and clear water. Cleanstains and other dirt with a brush and softtop cleaning agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always brush from front to back,following the grain of the fabric.

! Never use any of the following to clean thesoft top:RgasolineRthinnerRtar or stain removerRother organic solvents

! Remove bird droppings immediately, asthey are corrosive and can therefore causethe soft-top fabric to leak. Do not wash the

222 CareMaintenance

andcare

vehicle with a power washer or in a carwash that uses power washers. Do not usesharp-edged equipment to remove ice andsnow.

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top'sresistance to dirt.To restore this resistance to dirt, clean thesoft top using soft top cleaning agents thathave been recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Havethe soft-top seams sealed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Cover the soft top appropriately if youplan to leave the vehicle outside for a longperiod of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not use hard objects to clean the insidesof the windows, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wiper to the °position on the combination switch.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wipers start.

X When the wiper arms have reached avertical position, press the Start/Stopbutton.

X Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Care 223

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lightingX Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors! When cleaning the sensors with a powerwasher, maintain a distance between thevehicle and the nozzle of the power washerof at least 11.8 in (30 cm). Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

224 CareMaintenance

andcare

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available householdcleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar items

You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel andselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 225

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dry

afterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) orplacing them in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

226 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 228Where will I find...? ........................... 228Flat tire .............................................. 229Battery ............................................... 236Jump-starting .................................... 240Towing and tow-starting .................. 242Fuses .................................................. 244

227

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kitThe first-aid kit is located in the left-handstowage compartment in the trunk.X Open the trunk lid.

X Turn fastener; in the direction of thearrow.

X Open stowage compartment:.X Open the Velcro fastener and remove thefirst aid kit.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingcontents.

Vehicle tool kit

Wheel-change tool kit and jack11

The wheel-change tool kit and the jack arelocated in the left-hand stowage space in thetrunk.

Left-hand stowage space in trunk floor: Lug wrench; Towing eyeX Pull the loop on the floor covering and foldthe floor covering forward.

X Take out the jack and lug wrench:underneath it.

TIREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment boltand glovesThe TIREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment boltand gloves are located in the left-handstowage compartment in the trunk.

Left-hand stowage compartment in the trunk

11 Not included in the scope of delivery in all countries.

228 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

X Remove the jack from the left-handstowage space in the trunk to allow thestowage compartment to be opened.

X Turn fastener; in the direction of thearrow.

X Open stowage compartment:.X Remove the TIREFIT kit, wheel chock,alignment bolt and gloves.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit.X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Apply the electric parking brake manually(Y page 129).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to P with the buttonin the center console.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

TIREFIT kit

Using the TIREFIT kit

G WARNINGTIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFITcannot be used for cuts or punctures largerthan approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tiredamage caused by driving with extremely lowtire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or adamaged wheel.Do not drive the vehicle under suchcircumstances.Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for assistance or call RoadsideAssistance.

G WARNINGTake care not to allow the contents of TIREFITto come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed orabsorbed through the skin - causes skin, eyeand respiratory irritation.Any contact with eyes or skin should beflushed immediately with plenty of water.If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,change clothing as soon as possible.In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult aphysician immediately.

G WARNINGKeep TIREFIT away from children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately withplenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting.Consult a doctor immediately.Keep away from open flame or heat source.

You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal smallpunctures, particularly those in the tire tread.You can use TIREFIT at outside temperaturesdown to -40 †.

Flat tire 229

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Take the TIREFIT kit out of the trunk(Y page 228).

X Open the TIREFIT kit and remove "max.80 km/h" stickerD.

X Affix stickerD within the driver's field ofvision.

i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It canthen be removed like a layer of film.If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have itcleaned as soon as possible withperchloroethylene.

Comply with the manufacturer's safetyinstructions on the tire inflation compressorlabel and on the tire sealant bottle.

i You will also find operating instructions= in the lid of the TIREFIT kit.

X Pull the cable and filler hoseE out of thehousing.

X Unscrew flanged capA.

X Unscrew the cap from tire sealantbottle:. Make sure that the aluminumfilm is not damaged when doing so.

X Screw tire sealant bottle: clockwisetightly onto flange sealF.This pierces the aluminum film.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the faultytire.

X Make sure that pressure release screwCis closed.

X Remove the dust protection cap from fillerhoseE.

X Screw the end of filler hoseE onto tirevalveG.

X Make sure that on/off switch; on the tireinflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into the 12 V cigarettelighter socket (Y page 199).

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 113).i The battery discharges during tireinflation compressor usage. For this

230 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

reason, you should start the engine unlessyou are inflating the tire in an enclosedspace.

X Press on/off switch; on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflationcompressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).Switch the tire inflation compressor offbriefly to read the correct value frompressure gaugeB.

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than ten minutes ata time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

Tire pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi) is not reached

G WARNINGIf after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tireis too badly damaged to be repaired reliablyusing TIREFIT.

In this case TIREFIT cannot seal the tireproperly.Do not drive any further.Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for assistance or call RoadsideAssistance.

If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor,remove it and drive the vehicleapproximately 30 ft (10m) forward or back.This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.

X Leave tire sealant bottle: attached to theflange.

X Pump up the tire again.

Tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) is reachedIf the tire pressure is at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi):X Press on/off switch; on the tire inflationcompressor to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.

X Remove connector? from the 12 Vsocket.

X Remove filler hoseE from tire valveGand re-install the dust protection cap.Screw the valve cap onto the valve again.Leave tire sealant bottle: attached toflangeF.

X Stow the TIREFIT kit in a safe andaccessible place in the vehicle.

X Pull away immediately.

! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out ofthe filler hose. This could cause stains.

G WARNINGDo not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed tooperate at higher speeds.

Flat tire 231

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The sticker must be attached on theinstrument cluster where it will be easily seenby the driver.Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFITrepaired tire may change. Adapt your drivingaccordingly.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.

i On tires that are equipped with a tirepressure sensor (tire pressure monitor),the use of sealant can lead to malfunctionmessages and incorrect displays.Therefore, use pressure gaugeB in theTIREFIT kit to check and correct the tirepressure.

G WARNINGIf tire inflation pressure has fallen below130 kPa (1.3 bar/26 psi) do not continue todrive the vehicle.Park your vehicle safely away from theroadway and contact the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or RoadsideAssistance.Have the damaged tire replaced.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's side B-pillar or tirepressure table on the fuel filler flap).To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.To reduce the tire pressure: open releasescrewC.

! The manufacturer does not guaranteethat all tire damage can be repaired usingthe TIREFIT kit, particularly in the case ofcuts and punctureswith a diameter ofmorethan fourmillimeters or on the sidewall. Themanufacturer is not responsible fordamage caused by inappropriate use of theTIREFIT kit.

X Drive to the nearest workshop and have thetire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every fouryears at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Changing a wheel and mounting thespare wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 229).

X Bring the wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Take the following objects from the left-hand stowage compartment and the left-hand stowage space in the trunk:Rlug wrenchRfolding wheel chockRjackRalignment bolt

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

G WARNINGOnly jack up the vehicle on level ground or onslight inclines/declines. The vehicle couldotherwise fall off the jack and injure you orothers.

232 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 228).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On downhill gradients: place chocks orother suitable items in front of the wheelsof the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGWhen jacking up the vehicle, only use the jackwhich has been specifically approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle.The jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jacking points built into bothsides of the vehicle. The jack saddle must beplaced centrally under the jacking point. Thejack must always be vertical when in use,especially on inclines or declines.The jack is intended only for lifting the vehiclebriefly for wheel changes. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use thejack only to lift the vehicle during a wheelchange.Never get beneath the vehicle while it issupported by the jack. Keep hands and feetaway from the area under the lifted vehicle.Always lower the vehicle onto sufficientcapacity jackstands before working under thevehicle.Always firmly engage the parking brake andblock the wheels with wheel chocks or othersizable objects before raising the vehicle withthe jack. Do not disengage the parking brakewhile the vehicle is raised.

Flat tire 233

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Make sure that the ground on which thevehicle is standing and where you place thejack is solid, level and not slippery. Ifnecessary, use a large underlay. On slipperysurfaces, such as tiled floors, you should usea non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.Do not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack maynot be able to achieve its load-bearingcapacity if it is not at its full height.Never start the engine when the vehicle israised.Also observe the notes on the jack.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the wheel boltscompletely.

The mounting for the jack is centeredbetween the front and rear wheel housings(arrow).

G WARNINGThe jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jacking points. The jack

saddle must be placed centrally under thejacking point.If you do not position the jack correctly in thejacking point, the vehicle can fall off the jackand seriously or fatally injure you or others.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

X Make sure that the base of the jack ispositioned directly under jacking point;.

X Turn crank? clockwise until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crank? until the tire is raised amaximum of 1.2 inches (3 cm) off theground.

234 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Removing a wheel

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel boltcompletely.

X Screw alignment boltA into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

! AMG ceramic high performancecompound brake system:When detaching or attaching thewheel, thewheel rim may hit against the ceramicbrake disc and damage it.For this reason, you should proceedcarefully. Request the assistance of asecond person or use a second alignmentbolt.

X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGAlways replace wheel bolts that are damagedor rusted.Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.Damaged wheel hub threads should berepaired immediately. Do not continue todrive under these circumstances! Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or callRoadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightenedwheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.This could cause an accident. Make sure touse the correct wheel bolts.

G WARNINGOnly use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts.Other wheel bolts may come loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts when thevehicle is raised. Otherwise, the vehicle couldfall off the jack.

: Wheel bolt

G WARNINGMake sure to use the original length wheelbolts when remounting the original wheelafter it has been repaired.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Flat tire 235

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Place the wheel onto the alignment boltand push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequence

indicated (: toA). The specifiedtightening torque is 133 lb-ft(180 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to the out-of-useposition and stow it in the trunk again withthe rest of the wheel-changing tools.

Battery

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit anddamage your vehicle's electronic system. Thiscan disrupt driving safety systems such asABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program).RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lockduring braking. This limits the steerabilityof the vehicle when braking and the brakingdistance may increase. There is a risk ofaccident.RIf ESP®malfunctions, the vehicle will not bestabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel startsto spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involvingthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

236 BatteryBreakdow

nassistance

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on abattery.RIt is important that you observe thedescribed order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Battery 237

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron andfaceguard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact aphysician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use batterieswhich have been tested and approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Thesebatteries provide increased impactprotection to prevent vehicle occupants fromsuffering acid burns should the battery bedamaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the battery power supply has beeninterrupted, e.g. if the battery was fullydischarged, you will need to reset the"exterior mirrors automatic foldingfunction", by folding the mirrors out once(Y page 88).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.

238 BatteryBreakdow

nassistance

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 240).Never charge the battery if it is still installedin the vehicle, unless you use a batterycharger which has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unitspecially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehiclesand tested and approved by Mercedes-Benzis available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installedposition. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information andavailability. Charge the battery in accordancewith the separate instructions for theaccessory battery charger.Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 240).

Battery 239

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

240 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

X Press the electric parking brake handle.X Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 214).

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

Jump-starting 241

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryB to earth point? of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point? and negative terminal=, then frompositive clamp: and positive terminal;. Each time beginning with your vehicle's battery.

X Slide coverA of the positive terminal in the opposite direction to the arrow.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notesIf the vehicle can no longer be driven becauseof an accident or breakdown, you have thefollowing options:Rtransporting the vehicleAs a rule, you should have the vehicletransported.Rtowing the vehicle with the rear axle raisedOnly tow the vehicle with the rear axleraised in exceptional cases.Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or towbarOnly tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.The engine must be running if you tow thevehicle with a tow rope or tow bar. Observethe following notes.

G WARNINGThe rear axle locks when:Rthe engine is not runningRthe engine stalls while the vehicle is beingtowedRthere is a malfunction in the power supplyor the vehicle's electrical system

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a breakdown, you shouldalways have the vehicle transported.

G WARNINGIf the brake system or power steering ismalfunctioning and your vehicle is then towedaway, significantly more effort may berequired to steer and brake than is normallyrequired. There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

! Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button when towing the vehicle.Start the engine and keep it running. Turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition.Set the transmission to N using the E-SELECT lever. Make sure that you thenleave the SmartKey in position 2.Check the transmission position in theinstrument cluster.

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usean authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthis purpose.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

242 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! You may only tow the vehicle a maximumdistance of 30 miles (50 km). A towingspeed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not beexceeded.For towing distances over 30 miles(50 km), the vehicle must loaded onto atransporter.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Tow-starting the vehicle is not permitted.The transmission may otherwise bedamaged.

Also observe the following notes:RIf the engine does not start, try jump-starting it (Y page 240). Tow-starting thevehicle is not permitted.RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,have it transported to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RIf the vehicle has transmission damage,have it transported to a qualified specialistworkshop. Observe the display messagesin the instrument cluster.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eyeX Take the towing eye and the wheelwrench12 out of the wheel-change tool kit(Y page 228).

The bracket for the removable towing eye isin the bumper at the front. It is located underthe cover.

X Pull out cover: forwards.X Take cover: off the opening.

Removing the towing eyeX Take the lug wrench12 from the wheel-change tool kit (Y page 228).

X Insert the lug wrench handle into thetowing eye and turn it counter-clockwise.

X Unscrew the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Return the towing eye and the lug wrenchto the wheel-change tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedWhen towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 242).Only tow the vehicle with the rear axle raisedin exceptional cases.

! The engine must be switched off(SmartKey in ignition lock in position 0 orposition1) if the vehicle is being towedwiththe rear axle raised or if the parking brakeis being tested on a dynamometer.Intervention by ESP® could otherwisedamage the brake system.

12 Not included in the scope of delivery.

Towing and tow-starting 243

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 94).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition and that the engine isrunning throughout the towing procedure.

X Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Check the transmissionposition in the instrument cluster.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundWhen having your vehicle towed, observe theimportant safety notes (Y page 242).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 94).i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change ofdirection. In this case, only the turn signalsfor the desired direction flash. When thecombination switch is reset, the hazardwarning lamps start flashing again.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock(Y page 113).

X Start the engine and leave the SmartKey inthe ignition.

X Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever.

X Check the transmission position in theinstrument cluster display (Y page 119).

X Leave the engine running during the entiretowing procedure.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheelsor wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components.Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

X Start the engine.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition and that the engine isrunning during the entire loading operation.

X Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Check the transmissionposition in the instrument cluster.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to P with the buttonin the center console.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOnly use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benzwith the specified amperage for the system inquestion and do not attempt to repair orbridge a blown fuse. Using other thanapproved fuses or using repaired or bridgedfuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,and/or cause damage to electricalcomponents and/or systems. Have the causedetermined and remedied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listed

244 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

in the fuse allocation chart. An authorizedMercedes-Benz Center will be happy toadvise you.

i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdownservice or an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle and apply the electricparking brake.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:Rfuse box in the footwell on the front-passenger sideRfuse box in the rearThe "Relay and fuse information sheet" islocated with the wheel-change toolkit in thetrunk.

Fuse box in the footwell

X To open: remove the carpet over thefootrest.

X Loosen screws: on the floor panel usinga suitable tool.

X Remove the floor panel.

X To close: install the floor panel again.X Screw in and tighten screws:.X Put in the carpet and press to secure.

! The floor panelmust be installed properly,otherwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

Fuse box in the rear

Coupe

X To open: open the trunk.X Fold cover: in the center of the rear walldown in the direction of the arrow.

X To close: fold cover: up in the oppositedirection to the arrow and press to secure.

! The cover must be installed properly,otherwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

Roadster

Fuses 245

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X To open: from the vehicle interior, lift upcover: between the roll bars in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: shut cover: in the oppositedirection to the arrow and press to secure.

! The cover must be installed properly,otherwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

246 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 248Important safety notes .................... 248Operation ........................................... 248Winter operation ............................... 250Tire pressure ..................................... 251Loading the vehicle .......................... 258Maximum load rating ....................... 261Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 261Tire labeling ....................................... 263Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 266Changing a wheel ............................. 269Wheel and tire combinations ........... 270

247

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Important safety notes

Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerif you require information on approved andrecommended tires and wheels for summerand winter operation. Advice on purchasingand caring for tires is also available there.

G WARNINGReplace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G WARNINGWorn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.When replacing rims, only use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for theparticular rim type. Failure to do so can resultin the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always be

recognized on retreads. The operating safetyof the vehicle cannot be assured when suchtires are used.

G WARNINGIf you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that possibledamage to your vehicle has occurred, youshould turn on the hazard warning flashers,carefully slow down, and drive with caution toan areawhich is a safe distance from the road.Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbodyfor possible damage. If the vehicle appearsunsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or tiredealer for repairs.

G WARNINGDo not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youmight lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

i Further information about tires andwheels can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Operation

Notes on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check thetire pressures and correct them ifnecessary.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, may bedamaged.

248 OperationWheelsandtires

Notes on high performance tires

G WARNINGDue to the special tire tread in combinationwith the optimized rubber compound, there isan increased risk of hydroplaning andskidding on a damp or wet road surface. tiregrip is also noticeably reduced at low outsidetemperatures and low tire operatingtemperatures. There is a risk of an accident.Turn on ESP® and adapt your driving styleaccordingly. When the outside temperaturefalls below 10 †, use M+S tires.

i Different driving styles may lead to hightire wear and the tires may reach theminimum tire tread depth after only a shorttime.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheelsand tires

G WARNINGRegularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts,punctures, tears, bulges on tires anddeformation or cracks or severe corrosionon wheels) at least once a month, as wellas after driving off-road or on rough roads.Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tirepressure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 249). If necessary,turn the front wheels to full lock in order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface.

RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notinstall anything on the valve (such as tirepressure monitoring systems) other thanthe standard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle.RRegularly check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the emergency sparewheel or thespare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,and correct the pressure as necessary(Y page 251).

Tire tread

G WARNINGAlthough the applicable federal motor vehiclesafety laws consider a tire to be worn whenthe tread wear indicators (TWI) becomevisible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), werecommend that you do not allow your tiresto wear down to that level. As tread depthapproaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesionproperties on a wet road are sharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.

Do not use tires until they are excessivelyworn as the tire traction on wet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the tread depthis less than 1/8 in (3 mm).Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximately 1/16 in (1.6mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.The recommended tread depth for summertires is at least 1/8 in (3 mm). Therecommended tread depth for winter tires isat least 1/6 in (4 mm).

Operation 249

Wheelsandtires

Z

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.

Notes on selecting, mounting andreplacing tiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, break them in atmoderate speeds for the first60 miles (100 km), as they only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not use tires until they are excessivelyworn as the tire traction on wet roadsurfaces decreases significantly when thetread depth is less than 1/8 in (3 mm).RReplace the tires after six years at thelatest, regardless of wear. This also appliesto the spare wheel/emergency sparewheel.

The service life of tires depends on thefollowing factors amongst other things:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 269).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! There is not enough space for snowchains on some wheel sizes. Observe theinformation under "Tires and wheels" in the"Technical Data" section to avoid damageto the vehicle or the wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.RYou may not mount snow chains to allwheel-tire combinations; see theinformation under "Wheels and tires" in the"Technical data" section.ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as

250 Winter operationWheelsandtires

possible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RSnow chains must not be mounted onemergency spare wheels.

i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 56) when pulling away withsnow chains installed. You can therebyallow the wheels to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an increased drivingforce (cutting action).

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tread depth of less than 1/6inch (4 mm) must be replaced. They are nolonger suitable for winter operation.

G WARNINGIf you mount the spare wheel when drivingwith M+S tires, bear in mind that drivingstability will be impaired due to unstablecornering characteristics caused by thedifferent tire characteristics. Adapt your styleof driving accordingly.Have the spare wheel replaced by a normalwheel with an M+S tire at the nearestMercedes-Benz Center.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use all-season tires or winter tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. This is because

these tires were specifically developed fordriving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 251).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 257).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

You will find a table of recommended tirepressures on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar on thedriver's side (Y page 258). You will find atable of tire pressure for various operatingconditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuelfiller flap.

Tire pressure 251

Wheelsandtires

Z

To test tire pressure, use a suitable pressuregauge. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about thetire pressure. On vehicles equipped with theelectronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.

G WARNINGShould the tire pressure drop repeatedly:Rcheck the tire for foreign bodies.Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.Rmake sure that only a valve cap approvedby Mercedes-Benz is installed on the tirevalve.

Tire pressures that are too low have anegative effect on vehicle safety, which couldlead you to cause an accident.

Only correct tire pressures when the tires arecold. The tires are cold when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hours or drivenfor less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The tiretemperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed andthe tire load. If the tire temperature changesby 18 ‡ (10†), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressureof warm tires and only correct the tirepressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressurespecifications for cold tires on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

i The specifications given on the followingTire and Loading Information placard areexamples. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from the

data shown here. The tire pressuresapplicable to your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onyour vehicle.

The Tire and Loading Information placardshows recommended tire pressurespecifications: for cold tires when thevehicle is fully laden. The tire pressurespecifications apply to tires which aremounted at the factory.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, checkthe tires for punctures from foreign objectsand/or whether air is leaking from the valvesor from around the rim.

The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.If you wish to drive at high speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher when this isallowed, use the tire pressure table on theinside of the fuel filler flap to set the correcttire pressureswhen thewheels are cold. If thetire pressure is not set correctly, this can leadto an excessive build-up of heat and a suddenloss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Driving comfort can be impaired if the tirepressure value recommended in the tire

252 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

pressure table for speeds over100 mph (160 km/h) is adopted.

Make sure that the tire pressure for normalspeeds is adopted again.Additional specifications of tire pressurevalues for loads can also be found on the tirepressure table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustrationpurposes only. Tire pressure specificationsare vehicle-specific and may deviate fromthe data shown here. Tire pressurespecifications applicable to your vehicleare located in your vehicle's tire pressuretable.

Unless stated otherwise, the tire pressuresspecified on the fuel filler flap apply to all tiresapproved for this vehicle.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of passengers andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 263).

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristics

Tire pressure 253

Wheelsandtires

Z

Overinflation

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressure

G WARNINGNever exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure. Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Always observe the recommended tirepressure for your vehicle when adjusting thetire pressure (Y page 251).

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

254 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Check the tire pressures at least once amonth.Only check and correct tire pressures whenthe tires are cold (Y page 251).

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 251).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Thencheck the tire pressure again using the tirepressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notesIf a tire pressure monitor system is installed,the vehicle's wheels have sensors thatmonitor the tire pressures in all four tires. Thetire pressure monitor warns you if thepressure drops in one ormore of the tires. Thetire pressure monitor only functions if thecorrect wheel electronics units are installedon each wheel.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitoring system ismalfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for60 seconds and then remains lit constantly,the tire pressuremonitor ismalfunctioning.

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has not

Tire pressure 255

Wheelsandtires

Z

reached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately 1 minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

i USA only:If the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning, it may take more than10 minutes for the tire pressure warninglamp to inform you of the malfunction byflashing for 60 seconds and then remaininglit.When the malfunction has been rectified,the tire pressure warning lamp goes outafter a few minutes of driving.

Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the multifunction display.

i The tire pressure values indicated by theon-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to thosemeasured at

sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce thetire pressures.

i The operation of the tire pressuremonitorcan be affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Checking tire pressure electronicallyX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 113).

X Press the= or; button to select theServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTIRE PRESS.TIRE PRESS..

X Press thea button.

256 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

The current tire pressure for each wheel willbe displayed in the multifunction display.If the vehicle is parked for longer than20 minutes and you then drive at less than25 km/h, the Tire pressures will beTire pressures will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in period, the tire pressuremonitor automatically recognizes newwheelsor new sensors. As long as a clear allocationof the tire pressure values to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects asignificant pressure loss on one ormore tires,a warning message is shown in themultifunction display. A warning tone alsosounds and the tire pressure warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster.Each tire that is affected by a significant lossof pressure is highlighted with a color.If the following message appears in themultifunction display: Correct TireCorrect TirePressurePressureX Check the tire pressure on all four wheelsand correct it if necessary.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle areinterchanged, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thespecified values for monitoring.

In most cases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues, e.g. if you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresIf you are defining the new reference valuesmanually:X Use the table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap to ensure that the tire pressure is setcorrectly in all four tires for the currentoperating conditions.Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 251).

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press the= or; button to select theServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTIRE PRESS.TIRE PRESS..

X Press thea button.The display shows either the current tirepressure for the individual tires or theTire pressures will be displayedTire pressures will be displayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutesmessage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a few minutes of driving, the currentpressures are adopted as the newmonitoring values.

Canceling the restartX Press the% button.orX Press the9 button to leave the menu.

Tire pressure 257

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGDo not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresinstalled at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight ratingi The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating isvehicle-specific and may differ from that inthe illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weightrating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

X The Tire and Loading Information placardgives you details on maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating:: "The grossweight of occupants and luggage mustnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXXpounds."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

258 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seatsi The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Maximumnumber of seats: determines themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle (Y page 261).

Loading the vehicle 259

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load and cargo capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 259).

Example 1 Example 2

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupants andcargo (data from the Tireand Loading Informationplacard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

Step 2 Number of people in thevehicle (driver andoccupants)

1 2

Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 175 lbs(80 kg)

Occupant 1: 175 lbs(80 kg)Occupant 2: 195 lbs)(88 kg

Gross weight of alloccupants

175 lbs (80 kg) 370 lbs (168 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

Step 3 Permissible cargo andtrailer load/noseweight(maximum gross vehicleweight rating from the Tireand Loading Informationplacard minus the grossweight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) -175 lbs (80 kg) =1325 lbs (600 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) -370 lbs (168 kg) =1130 lbs (512 kg)

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 261).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle

weight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 258).

260 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight ofthe vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usuallyapproximately 10% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its load.Your Mercedes-Benz has been designedprimarily to carry passengers and theirluggage. Mercedes-Benz does notrecommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Maximum load rating

G WARNINGDo not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Maximum tire load: is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.Further information on tire loads(Y page 263).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: tread wear:,tire traction;, and heat resistance=. Alltires sold in North America are provided withthe corresponding quality class mark on the

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 261

Wheelsandtires

Z

sidewall of the tire, even though theseregulations do not apply to Canada.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.For example:

Tread wear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government test track asa tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent

the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

G WARNINGIf ice has formed on the road, tire traction willbe substantially reduced. Under suchweatherconditions, drive, steer and brake withextreme caution.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tiretread depth of 1/6 in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 251) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor

262 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

laboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labelingThe following markings are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation)and the manufacturer's name:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 267)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 266)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 261)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 254)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 266)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating (Y page 263)

D Load index (Y page 265)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tire

Tire labeling 263

Wheelsandtires

Z

pressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is theratio between the tire height and tire widthand is shown as a percentage. The aspectratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load bearing index: load bearing indexAis a numerical code which specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

G WARNINGThe tire load rating must always be at leasthalf of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,sudden tire failure may be the result whichcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you or others.Always replace rims and tires with rims andtires having the same specifications(designation, manufacturer and type) asshown on the original part.

G WARNINGDo not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Example:The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to amaximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) that thetire can carry. For further information on themaximum tire load in kilograms and pounds,see (Y page 261).For further information on the load bearingindex, see Load index (Y page 265).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGEven when permitted by law, never operate avehicle at speeds greater than the maximumspeed rating of the tires.Exceeding themaximum speed for which tiresare rated can lead to sudden tire failure,causing loss of vehicle control and possiblyresulting in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury and possible death, for youand for others.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R Up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) Above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

264 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specifications consist of loadbearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed rating,and the maximum speed of the tire islimited to 186 mph (300 km/h).REvery tire that has amaximum speed above186mph (300 km/h) must have "ZR" in thesize description and the servicespecification must be given in brackets.Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speedrating "(Y)" shows that the maximum speedof the tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h).Ask the tire manufacturer about themaximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S13 Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S13 Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S13 Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S13 Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires that have the M+Sidentification offer the drivingcharacteristics of winter tires. In additionto the M+S marking, winter tires also havethei snowflake symbol on the tire wall.Tires with this identification fulfill therequirements of the Rubber Manufacturers

Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow and have beenespecially developed for driving on snow.

The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating as specified in the "Tires"section (Y page 270), e.g. if you buy newtires.Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed ratingB(Y page 263) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

13 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 265

Wheelsandtires

Z

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to informpurchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of theU.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols.Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.

For example, a tire that ismarkedwith "3208"was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.

Tire characteristics

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall: and undertire tread;.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and materialusedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. There are14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

266 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants the vehicle isdesigned to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by themanufacturer following specifications fromthe U.S. government testing procedures. Theratings are molded into the sidewall of thetire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure for yourvehicle under normal driving conditions. Youwill find the recommendation on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of your vehicle. Therecommended tire pressure provides the bestbalance between handling characteristics,ride comfort and wear. Supplementalinformation pertaining to special drivingsituations can be found on the tire inflationpressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) as specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permitted grossweight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of the curbweight of the vehicle, the weight of theaccessories, the total load limit and theweight of the optional equipment installed atthe factory.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 267

Wheelsandtires

Z

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is theequivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals(kPa) to 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold. For this,the vehicle must have been stationary for atleast three hours or not have traveled morethan 1.6 km (1 mile) in this time.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been drivenmore than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

268 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rackor a high-voltage battery, are not included inthe curb weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle'sdesignated seating capacity.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 229) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. It also providesinstructions on changing a wheel or mountingthe spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rear wheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If this is not

Changing a wheel 269

Wheelsandtires

Z

available, the tires should then be replacedevery 3000 to 6000 miles(5000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wearrequires this. Do not change the direction ofwheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressures.Information on changing tires and mountingthe spare wheel (Y page 232).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.You may mount a spare wheel/emergencyspare wheel against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on the sparewheel/emergency spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGDo not use power washers with circular-jetnozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, inparticular the tires. You could otherwisedamage the tires and cause an accident.

Wheel and tire combinations

Points to remember! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use Tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (onlycertain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Further information about tires, wheels andapproved combinations can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i The Tire and Load Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side. Furtherinformation about driving at high speeds ordriving with vehicle loads that are lighterthan the maximum vehicle load can befound in the tire pressure table on theinside of the fuel filler flap. Check tire

270 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

pressures regularly, and only when the tiresare cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tiremanufacturer.These are located in the vehicle documentwallet.

Further information on recommended tirepressures as well as tire pressures forspecific driving situations, see (Y page 251).

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle(left/right)Rwith the same type of tires on all wheelsat a given time (summer tires, wintertires)

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rims and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you wish to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you will also require,in certain circumstances, wheel rims of anappropriate size, as the sizes of approvedwinter tires can deviate from those ofstandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 271

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

Summer tires

Front axle

Summer tires 265/35 ZR19 (98Y) XL

Light alloy rim 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 60or9.5J x 19 H2 ET 59

Rear axle

Summer tires14 295/30 ZR20 (101Y) XL

Light alloy rim 11J x 20 H2 ET 68

Winter tires, variant 1

Front axle

Winter tires 265/35 R19 98W XL M+S

Light alloy rim 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 60or9.5J x 19 H2 ET 59

Rear axle

Winter tires14 295/30 R20 101W XL M+S

Light alloy rim 11J x 20 H2 ET 68

Winter tires, variant 2

Front and rear axles

Winter tires 255/35 R19 96V XL M+S

Light alloy rim 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 59

14 Snow chains not permitted.

272 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 274Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 274Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 274Warranty ............................................ 275Identification plates ......................... 275Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 276Vehicle data ...................................... 282

273

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 22).

Information regarding technical data

You can find technical data on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.com

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

G WARNINGDriving safety may be impaired if non-approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-relevant accessories are used.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Thiscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts orparts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheelsand accessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the same

quality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systemsmay beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRdashboardRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has beenspecifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 275) and the enginenumber (Y page 276) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

274 Genuine Mercedes-Benz partsTechnicaldata

Warranty

The Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your vehicle.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. You can obtaininformation about this from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service andWarranty Information booklet, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrangefor a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)and paint code number

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the identification plateis example data. This data is different forevery vehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Identification plates 275

Technicaldata

Z

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

Additionally, the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) can be found in the followinglocations:Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 275)Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 276)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Engine number (stamped into the

crankcase)

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing and disposing of servicefluids. Otherwise, you could endangerpersons or the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into direct contactwith your skin or clothing.If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

276 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Filling capacities

Capacity Fuel, coolant, lubricants,etc.

Engine oil and filter 8.43 US qt (7.98 l) Approved engine oils

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission, hydraulicchamber

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)+ 0.85 US qt (0.8 l) for oilcooler and hose lines at thefirst filling

Shell DCT F.3

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission, gear set,drive set and differentialchamber

3.06 US qt (2.9 l)+ 0.87 US qt (0.82 l) for oilcooler and hose lines at thefirst filling

Shell GL.5

Power steering 1.26 US qt (1.2 l) Chevron Texaco CHF 9109

Brake system Approximately 0.53 US qt(0.5 l)

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)

Cooling system Approximately 11.6 US qt(11.0 l)

MB 325.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze agent

Tank capacity 22.5 US gal (85.0 l) Premium-grade unleadedgasoline (at least 91 octane,average value between96 RON/86 MON)

Reserve Approximately 3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

Automatic climate control — Refrigerant R134a andspecial PAG lubricant (neverR 12)

Windshield/headlampcleaning system

6.3 US qt (6.0 l) MB windshield washerconcentrate15(Y page 281)Mixing ratio for washer fluid(Y page 281)

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.

15Mixed with water or premixed washer fluid with antifreeze protection.

Service products and filling capacities 277

Technicaldata

Z

You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Total capacity 85 l

Of which reserve Approximately 14 l

Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1)

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. The repaircosts are high. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

! You should only refuel with unleadedpremium-grade gasoline as this avoidsdamaging the catalytic converter.If engine running problems are apparent,have the cause checked immediately andrepaired. Excess unburned fuel canotherwise enter the catalytic converter,leading to overheating and possiblycausing a fire.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline may be used.If there is no premium-grade unleadedgasoline available and regular unleadedgasoline must be used, please observe thefollowing precautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full withregular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration.Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.two passengers without luggage, do notallow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is beingoperated in mountainous terrain, do notdepress the accelerator pedal furtherthanÔ of the pedal travel.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleadedgasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasolinewith additives can be used.The concentration of additives in the fuel,however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed3%.Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.

278 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

All of these blends must fulfill the fuelrequirements, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYouwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or onthe Internet at http://www.mbusa.com(USA only).

Information on refueling (Y page 125).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivescan increase wear and tear to the fuelsystem high-pressure pump and lead tocontamination of the entire fuel system.The repair costs are high. This does notinclude additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Moreinformation about recommended additivescan be obtained from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

One of the main problems of poor fuel qualityis the forming of deposits that are createdduring the gasoline combustion process.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.If you use fuels without these additives overa longer period of time, carbon deposits maybuild up. These deposits form at the inletvalves and in the combustion chamber inparticular.This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idleRengine noise

RmisfiringRloss of powerCarbon deposits may form if the availabilityof gasoline with relevant additives isinsufficient (in certain regions). In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends additivesapproved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.For a list of approved products, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, youmay damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Service products and filling capacities 279

Technicaldata

Z

MB sheet number 229.516

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Engine with oil filter 10.0 US qt (9.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)classification suitable for the prevailingoutside temperatures. The table shows youwhich SAE classifications are to be used. Thelow-temperature characteristics of engineoils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as aresult of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It istherefore strongly recommended that youcarry out regular oil changes using anapproved engine oil with the appropriate SAEclassification.

Refrigerant of the air-conditioningsystemThe automatic climate control is filled withR134a refrigerant and a special PAGlubricant.

! Never use refrigerant R 12 (CFC) ormineral lubricants. Otherwise, you coulddamage the air-conditioning system.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGOver a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air; this lowers its boilingpoint.If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,vapor pockets may form in the brake systemwhen the brakes are applied hard (e.g. whendriving downhill). This would impair brakingefficiency.You should have the brake fluid renewed atregular intervals. The brake fluid changeintervals can be found in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAntifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, openflames and smoking are prohibited whenhandling antifreeze.

16 Restriction: only use SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

280 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

If antifreeze comes into contact with hotengine parts, it may ignite and you could burnyourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hotengine parts.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends anantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in

accordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

Windshield/headlamp cleaningsystem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

Service products and filling capacities 281

Technicaldata

Z

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB WinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

All models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:RThe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- Tires- Load- Condition of the suspension- Optional equipmentRThe vehicle length specified includes thefront license plate adapter.

Vehicle data, CoupeThe data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle length 182.7 in (4640 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 49.7 in (1262 mm)

Wheelbase 105.5 in (2680 mm)

Front track 66.2 in (1682 mm)

Rear track 65.0 in (1651 mm)

Ground clearance 3.9 in (99 mm)

Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.9 m)

Vehicle weight

Maximum trunkload

137 lb (62 kg)

Vehicle data, RoadsterThe data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle length 182.7 in (4640 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 49.6 in (1261 mm)

Wheelbase 105.5 in (2680 mm)

Front track 66.2 in (1682 mm)

Rear track 65.0 in (1651 mm)

Ground clearance 3.9 in (99 mm)

Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.9 m)

282 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Vehicle weight

Maximum trunkload

137 lb (62 kg)

Opening dimensions of the trunk lid

Coupe: Opening height: 63.4 in (1,610 mm) (rear

spoiler retracted)Opening height: 66.0 in (1,677 mm) (rearspoiler extended)

Roadster: Opening height: 67.4 in (1,713 mm) (rear

spoiler retracted)Opening height: 68.2 in (1,732 mm) (rearspoiler extended)

i The values specified may differ from theactual values depending on the tires, load,optional equipment and condition of thesuspension.

Opening dimensions, gullwing doors

: Range of movement exceeding vehiclewidth: 14.3 in (362 mm)

; Opening height: 73.7 in (1,873 mm)(exterior mirrors folded in)Opening height: 76.6 in (1,946 mm)(exterior mirrors folded in)

i The values specified may differ from theactual values depending on the tires, load,optional equipment and condition of thesuspension.

Vehicle data 283

Technicaldata

Z

284